Home

Kilomux-2100/2104 - RAD Data Communications

1. The display fields are as follows e DATABASE Lists the module type as stored in the database e HARDWARE Lists the module type of each active installed module as reported by the module itself e SOFTWARE REVISION Lists the software revision of the module e HARDWARE REVISION Lists the hardware revision of the module e HARDWARE FAILURE Indicates whether a hardware failure has been detected in this module during the power up self test or during regular operation e OPERATED HIGHWAY Indicates the internal Kilomux bus to which the specified module is connected ML A Module connected to the bus of main link A ML B Module connected to the bus of main link B NC PB Module is not connected to a main link bus displayed only when the priority bumping or the switched backup mode is used In addition the display provides the following information for each of the channels available on this module The channel number B is identified in the left hand column CH i j If the module installed in the selected slot does not include channels recognizable by the Kilomux KCL module e g it is a KLS 2 module the information is presented only for the module composite channel and the left hand column shows COMP A e CONNECT Indicates whether this channel has been allocated bandwidth on the main link is connected to the main link YES The channel has been allocated main link b
2. UVUUUIUHH HSEWUOH where X stands for the digits of the current IP address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Change a parameter by placing the cursor on the desired field delete the current value and type the new value The only exception is TELNET_APATHY_TIME which is selected by pressing the F or B keys Remember that community names are case sensitive Continue until all the parameters are defined and then press ENTER to end A typical display as seen after all the parameters are selected is shown below ENT PARAME P ADDRESS IS XXX XXX XXX XXX UBNET MASK IS XXX XXX XXX XXX KAD COMMUNITY IS public RITE COMMUNITY IS private TRAP COMMUNITY IS public I S DEFAULT GATEWAY IS XXX XXX XXX XXX R W where X stands for the digits for the current IP address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway The agent parameters displayed on the data form and their range of values are as follows TELNET_APATHY_TIME Press the F or B key to select the time in minutes after which a TELNET connection will automatically be terminated if no incoming activity is detected The available values are 10MIN 15MIN and 20MIN Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description e IP_ADDRESS Type the IP address assigned to the SNMP agent in the dotted quad form four groups of digits ranging O through 255 separated by
3. where terminal stands for the terminal name 2 To reset the control codes to 0 type NIT F lt ENTER gt Purpose Loads the Kilomux database to a file to enable transfer to a remote Kilomux via TFTP This enables you to control a remote Kilomux database and to configure other Kilomuxes with the same database Refer to the Update DB 1 2 command Loading the database is performed from a file named CNFG DAT Configure the local remote file of your TFTP application to point to this file Use 1 Load db 1 lt ENTER gt for the first database of the Kilomux 2 Load db 2 lt ENTER gt for the second database of the Kilomux Purpose Software download to KVF 6 or KVF 8 modules through a DL connection in the modules front panel or from the KCL Common Logic card Format LOAD IO i DL or LOAD IO i KCL Use To perform software download using DL cable to KVF 6 or KVF 8 module installed in the Kilomux type 1 Load IO i DL lt ENTER gt where i is the I O slot number 1 through 12 Wait until the TST LED in the card starts to blink Connect your download cable to the specified DL connection in the card and connect the other end to one of the communication ports in the PC Use your download application in the PC to load the software Commands F 53 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual To perform software download through the Kilomux common
4. The following is displayed ERS LIST PARAME RESS 1 IS MASK 1 IS ESS 2 IS MASK 2 IS ESS 3 IS H o H o m o BO A E D S e E E MASK 3 IS ESS 10 IS MASK 10 IS DSP KVF5 or DSP PBX Purpose Display the configuration parameters of the KVF 5 modules that comprise a group connected to the PBX interface Format DSP PBX or DSP KVF5 Use e Type DSP PBX lt ENTER gt or DSP KVF5 lt ENTER gt Commands F 37 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Display Format A typical data form for a T1 group is shown below CARD TYPE KVEF5 T1 M KVF5 T1 S TS GROUP FROM PBX TO PBX CCS ABCD POLARITY EXIST 05 1 2 3 4 A B N A 0101 NORMAL YES 05 5 6 7 8 N A N A N A N A N A NO The fields appearing on the data form are as follows DSP KVF6 SLOT Displays the slot in which each module of the group is installed CARD TYPE Displays the module type installed in the corresponding slot KVF5 T1 M or KVF5 T1 S for KVF 5 modules for T1 KVF5 E1 M or KVF5 E1 S for KVF 5 modules for E1 interface TS_GROUP Group of time slots served by the module installed in the corresponding slot FROM_PBX Signaling to be transferred through the Kilomuxes TO_PBX Signaling to be transmitted to the PBX CCS If the selected signaling mode is CCS from and to PBX then this field w
5. EGAL COMBINATION OF CHANNEL EED AND PROTOCOL Conflict in the channel parameters of the KLS 1 module being configured you are trying to select a data rate of 38 4 kbps but the channel is configured for asynchronous operation The maximum data rate for asynchronous operation is 19 2 kbps LEGAL NUMBI ER OF MODUL E CONTROL SIGNALS The number of control signals that can be transmitted for any module is none 1 2 or 4 You are trying to select a forbidden value e g you cannot select RTS on one channel of a given module and DTR and RTS on another channel of the same module Configuration Error Messages B 9 Appendix B Alarms Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual ERROR 07 BANDWIDTH OVERFLOW ML lt A or B nothing or PRIORITY gt The total bandwidth required for the active channels exceeds the main link data rate Change channel configuration as required or increase the main link data rate During the definition of channel connections DEF CON command e For dual link operation the number of channels you want to connect to a given main link requires a bandwidth that exceeds the available main link bandwidth e For priority bumping operation the number of channels assigned HIGH priority requires a bandwidth that exceeds the available main link bandwidth ERROR 08 ER AND FALLBACK CLOCKS ARE You cannot select the same data channel as b
6. You are selecting a time slot group that is already connected KVF 5 and KVF 6 cards ERROR 60 FRAGMENTATION IN FRAM Kilomux can not use the full free frame space for current configuration ERROR 201 EDS SHOULD BE The main link data rates configured on two Kilomux connected in a link must be equal ERROR 202 ML TIMINGS SHOULD BE DIFFERENT The timing modes of two Kilomux connected in a link must be different In particular do not select the INT source at both ends of a link when KML 5 KML 6 KML 7 or KML 8 modules are used ERROR 203 LOCAL AND REM SLOTS OR PARAMETERS NOT COMPATIBLI lt parameter name gt The values assigned to the specified parameter in two Kilomux connected in a link are incompatible ERROR 204 LOCAL AND REM MUX ML MODES NOT COMPATIBL Incorrect main link configuration of Kilomux connected in a link e For drop amp insert configuration check that the main link mode for the dropping Kilomux is dual link and that the other units are configured for single link e For other configurations check that identical modes are used at both ends ERROR 205 ML B gt ML A PRIORITY SHOULD EQUAL ML A gt ML B PRIORITY Select identical priorities for switching between the two links ERROR 206 E ALLOCATION TYPE AUTO MANUAL SHOULD BE The frame allocation mode of t
7. T DSP ST FRAM A B or DSP ST FR A B Use 1 To display frame information for main link A type DSP ST FRAME A lt ENTER gt or DSP ST FR A lt R gt If Kilomux is equipped with only one main link module it is not necessary to identify the main link 2 To display frame information for main link B type DSP ST FRAME B lt ENTER gt or DSP ST FR B lt R gt Display Format AUTO Frame Bit Allocation A typical DSP ST FRAME display when the frame bit allocation mode selected by means of the DEF SYS command is automatic is shown below XXX BIT XXX KBPS XXX KBPS XXX KBPS XXX KBPS XXX KBPS XXX KBPS XXX KBPS XXX KBPS The display fields are as follows Commands F 41 Appendix F Command Set Description FRAME LENGTH BIT WEIGHT BYPASS START I O CH1 START CH1 SIZE Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual e FRAME LENGTH Total number of bits contained in one main link frame and the main link data rate in kbps e BIT WEIGHT Main link bandwidth allocation unit in kbps e DATA USAGE The main link bandwidth allocated to user data in kbps e CONTROL USAGE The main link bandwidth allocated to the transfer of user end to end signaling in kbps e SYNC USAGE The main link bandwidth allocated to the frame synchronization word in kbps e DOWNLOAD USAGE The main l
8. Format DEF DP Use 1 Type DEF DP lt ENTER gt If the KCL 2 module has an Ethernet interface the following is displayed ROUTING PROTOCOL NONE where NONE is the default value If the KCL 2 module has RS 232 interfaces the following is displayed PARITY CALL OUT MODE NONE NO where the parameter values are the default values 2 Change the parameter values as follows Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by pressing the space bar To change the selected field press F or B to scroll among the available selections When the desired selection is displayed press the space bar to move to the next field e When done press ENTER The second line of parameters is displayed The following is a typical display LOG OFF AUXILIARY DE E ROUTING PROTOCOL NO NMS_SLIP NONE Table F 2 shows the dial out parameters and their values F 16 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table F 2 Dial out Parameters Appendix F Command Set Description Designation Function Values SPEED Selects the dial out port data rate 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 and 57600 bps DATA Selects the number of data bits in the 7 or 8 data bits dial out port word format PARITY Controls the use of parity ODD Odd parity EVEN Even parity NO Parity disabled only available with 8 data bits C
9. RAD data communications Installation and Operation Manual Kilomux 2100 2104 Data Voice Fax and LAN Integrating Modular Multiplexer Kilomux 2100 2104 Data Voice Fax and LAN Integrating Modular Multiplexer Installation and Operation Manual Notice This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications Ltd RAD No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written approval by RAD Data Communications Right title and interest all information copyrights patents know how trade secrets and other intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the Kilomux 2100 2104 and any software components contained therein are proprietary products of RAD protected under international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RAD Kilomux 2100 2104 is a registered trademark of RAD No right license or interest to such trademark is granted hereunder and you agree that no such right license or interest shall be asserted by you with respect to such trademark You shall not copy reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the Manual or the Kilomux 2100 2104 You are prohibited from and shall not directly or indirectly develop market distribute license or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality as the Kilomux 2100 2104 based on or derived in any way from the Kilomux 2100 2104
10. ALARM RELAY Indicates the status of Kilomux alarm relay contacts ON or OFF INSTALLED MODULES Lists for each slot the installed module and the module programmed in the database Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description EDIT DB Note EXIT Purpose Select a database on which the following commands will be executed The selected database is identified by the working prompt e KM2100 gt for the on line database the database now used by Kilomux 2100 or KM2104 gt for the on line database the database now used by Kilomux 2104 e ALT DB gt for the off line database Format EDIT DB Use 1 To select the other database while working on the on line database type at the KM2100 gt or KM2104 gt prompt EDIT DB lt ENTER gt The working prompt changes to ALT_DB gt 2 To select the on line database while working on the alternate database type at the ALT _DB gt prompt EDIT DB lt ENTER gt The working prompt changes to KM2100 gt or KM2104 gt When you exit the configuration program and return the control to the LCD the database currently defined to be on line irrespective of the database being edited is forced to remain the on line database Purpose End the current session and return control to the Kilomux front panel Format EXIT Use e Type EXIT lt ENTER g
11. Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Set DIP switch 3 on the KCL 2 back panel to OFF then set it to ON and then back to OFF This is needed to prevent erasing the KCL 2 software in case you mistakenly turn the power on while DIP switch 3 is set to ON Wait until the TST LED on the KCL 2 back panel is on and the ALM LED on the KCL 2 back panel is flashing Now the Flash memory is erased If a fault occurs during the erase process the red ALM indicator turns on In this case turn the Kilomux off and start the procedure again with DIP switch 3 ON 6 Connect the serial port of the PC to the Supervisory Port 9 pin connector of the KCL 2 module designated CONTROL on the panel Use a standard straight communication cable Run the DL EXE program After the program starts select the option C and configure the PC for downloading as follows Select the option P and then select the PC serial port COM1 or COM2 which is connected to the KCL 2 module Press ESC Select the option F and type KM2100 AR as the file name Press ESC Start sending the file by selecting the option S The software file is sent to the Kilomux You can monitor the progress of file transmission on the PC as the software is being sent to the Kilomux The TST LED and the ALM LED of the KCL 2 module is flashing while data transfer proceeds normally If a fault occurs during file sending the red ALM indicator of the KCL 2 module turns o
12. Kilomux SNMP management functions are provided by an internal SNMP agent located in the KCL 2 module SNMP management uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP which is a connections mode transport protocol part of the Internet Protocol IP suite of protocols This section covers the information related to the SNMP environment SNMP Principles The SNMP management protocol is an asynchronous command response polling protocol all the management traffic is initiated by the SNMP based network management station except for trap messages which addresses the managed entities in its management domain Only the addressed managed entity answers the polling of the management station The managed entities include a function called an SNMP agent which is responsible for interpretation and handling of the management station requests to the managed entity and the generation of properly formatted responses to the management station SNMP Operations The SNMP protocol includes four types of operations e getRequest Command for retrieving specific management information from the managed entity The managed entity responds with a getResponse message e getNextRequest Command for retrieving sequentially specific management information from the managed entity The managed entity responds with a getResponse message SNMP Environment C1 Appendix C SNMP Management Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual C 2 e setRequest Com
13. ti P ters ifi fi ti pem paramere pegig K oniguratign Technical System Characteristics 1 53 Instructions 3 2 E 1 ACTIVE ML 3 3 Terminal Characteristics 2 8 CLK_FBACK 3 3 TIMING Sot E34 CLK MASTER 3 2 Timing Modes of ISDN Channels 1 48 DWLD_BW_A DWLD_BW B 3 3 Tone Injection 5 11 ML_MODE 3 3 Turn Off 4 14 System Supervision and Configuration 1 4 System Timing Considerations 1 39 w DCE Timing 1 42 Warm Installation Upgrading Procedure DTE Timing 1 40 Windows Based Stations D 3 External DCE Timing 1 41 Internal Timing 1 43 1 44 1 45 Loopback Timing 1 43 Main Link Timing 1 46 Downloading Procedure D 3 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual RAD 24 Raoul Wallenberg St Tel Aviv 69719 Israel Tel 972 3 6458181 Fax 972 3 6483331 972 3 6498250 E mail erika _y rad co il Web site www rad com Customer Response Form RAD Data Communications would like your help in improving its product documentation Please complete and return this form by mail or by fax or send us an e mail with your comments Thank you for your assistance Manual Name Kilomux 2100 2104 Publication Number 425 200 11 04 gt gt gt O Oo Please grade the manual according to the following factors Excellent Good Fair Poor Very Poor Installation instructions g g g g g Operating instructions g g g g g Manual organization g g g g g Illustrations
14. Handling Energized Products General Safety Practices Do not touch or tamper with the power supply when the power cord is connected Line voltages may be present inside certain products even when the power switch if installed is in the OFF position or a fuse is blown For DC powered products although the voltages levels are usually not hazardous energy hazards may still exist Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecommunication lines remove jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts Unless otherwise specified all products are intended to be grounded during normal use Grounding is provided by connecting the mains plug to a wall socket with a protective earth terminal If an earth lug is provided on the product it should be connected to the protective earth at all times by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider Rack mounted equipment should be mounted only in earthed racks and cabinets Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last Do not connect telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment Make sure that all other cables are disconnected before disconnecting the ground Connection of AC Mains Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes Always connect the AC plug to a wall socket with a protective ground The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power to the product i
15. 2 5 Chapter 2 Installation Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Current and Power Capabilities of Kilomux Power Supply Modules The following table lists the power that can be provided by the individual Kilomux power supply modules when cooled by free air connection Table 2 2 Nominal Power Consumption of Power Supply Modules Module 5V Output 12V Output 12V Output Maximum Total Power Per Module Power W Power W Power W W KPS 3 KPS 5 15 5 4 8 4 8 25 KPS 4 30 12 9 6 50 KPS 6 55 10 2 10 2 56 KPS 7 55 10 2 10 2 56 KPS 8 120 24 18 130 Kilomux 2104 AC 30 T2 7 2 30 Kilomux 2104 48 40 T2 7 2 40 Note Power supply modules of the Kilomux 2100 have load sharing capabilities By installing two KPS modules it is possible to double the allowed loading If the power requirements exceed the capabilities of a single power supply module you cannot consider that the two modules are providing redundancy Any failure must be immediately corrected KPS 4 The nominal output power specified for the KPS 4 module can be safely exceeded to the following maximum output power 5V 40W 12V 18W 12V 12W The total power supplied by the module CANNOT exceed the Maximum Total Power Per Supply of 50W KPS 6 KPS 7 The 5V output must always be loaded The minimum current consumption from the 5V output is 3A 15W If a lower current is needed use a power supply module with lower output currents With forced ai
16. 50 AIS SYNC LOSS State The local frame synchronization has been lost SLOT i because of AIS reception 51 RED ALARM SLOT i State Local main link module lost synchronization to incoming data stream May indicate a configuration error or a technical failure For T1 links this condition is the red alarm 52 E1 LOCAL SYNC LOSS State Local main link module lost synchronization to SLOT i incoming data stream May indicate a configuration error or a technical failure For T1 links this condition is the red alarm 53 LOCAL MF S LOSS Event On an E1 link operating with 256S framing the SLOT i local module has lost multiframe synchronization 54 REMOTE MF S LOSS Event On an E1 link operating with 256S framing the SLOT i remote equipment has lost multiframe synchronization 55 YELLOW ALARM State Remote equipment lost synchronization to the SLOT i incoming data stream May indicate a configuration error or a technical failure For T1 links this condition is the yellow alarm 56 E1 REMOTE SYNC LOSS State The KML 8 module installed in the specified slot SLOT i reports remote loss of frame alignment ML A ML B 57 FRAME SLIP SLOT i Event A main link frame slip has occurred This is usually caused by incorrect selection of clock sources 58 BPV ERROR SLOT i State The number of coding errors detected in the main link signal received by the active module is too high the bipolar violation rate exceeds 1x10 for 1000 consecutive seconds This may indicate a
17. NAME mid IP Address MUX Name Distance Physical Distance 192 115 7139 down 006 POA SLES TLS s up 006 TIME HH MM SS E Day MM DD YY DSP REV Purpose Display the list of modules installed in the Kilomux module and the hardware and software versions of each module Format DSP REV i Use 1 To display information on all the modules type DSP REV lt ENTER gt The supervision terminal displays the list of slots in which modules that include programmable components can be installed the type of module installed in each slot and the module hardware and software revision F 40 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description The general organization of the display is illustrated below CARD TYPE SOFTWARE REV HARDWARE LOT 3 MI XX YY XX YY LOT 4 XX YY XX YY LOT 5 XX YY XX YY LOT OPTIONS XX YY XX YY LOT 1 XX YY XX YY LOT 2 XX YY XX YY XX YY XX YY a XX YY XX YY LOT 12 XX YY XX YY 2 To display the information related to a specific module type DSP REV i lt ENTER gt where i is the number of the Kilomux slot of the desired module 3 4 5 OP and I O slots 1 through 12 DSP ST FRAME Purpose Display information on the frame structure and the use of the available main link bandwidth Refer to the General Information chapter for additional information Format
18. Note resistor Direction Direction IN input to Kilomux OUT A 2 Supervisory Port Connector Function Frame ground TX data RX data Carrier detect Not connected Data terminal ready Signal ground Request to send See Note below See Note below Alarm relay NC contact Alarm relay common Alarm relay NO contact Alarm indication Data set ready Ring indicator Pins 9 10 are connected to the 12V and 12V lines through a 300 2 1 2W series output from Kilomux Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Data Pin AJN A uo O aOlNID A 3 MNG Connector The MNG connector is a 9 pin female connector intended for direct connection to a dial up modem e The connection of the MNG connector to a dial up modem terminal having a 9 pin connector is made by means of a straight cable e The connection to a dial up modem with 25 pin connector should be made using a cable wired in accordance with the Connection to Dial up Modem with 25 pin Connector column of Table A 3 Table A 3 Common Logic Module KCL 2 MNG Connector Pin Allocations Line Direction Connection to Dial Up Modem with 25 pin Connector Data Carrier Detect DCD IN 8 Receive Data RD IN 3 Transmit Data TD OUT 2 Data Terminal Ready DTR OUT 20 Signal Ground SIG Common reference and 7 DC power supply ground Data Set Ready IN 6 Request to Send RTS OUT 4 Clear to Send CTS IN 5 Ring Indi
19. e Local Management e Remote Management e Neighbor Management The KCL 2 module of the Kilomux system is available with a Supervisory Port Connector CONTROL port and with one of the following three Management Port interfaces e MNG 9 pin Dial Port e ETHERNET UTP Ethernet interface e ETHERNET BNC Ethernet interface The Supervisory Port Connector and the Management Port are located on the rear panel of the KCL 2 These interfaces allow the operator to manage the local or remote Kilomux in several modes Local Management Kilomuxes are connected via a link One Kilomux is local and the other is remote Local management operates and configures the local Kilomux There are several options for local management e Supervisory Port Connector Allows the operator to manage a local Kilomux from a standard ASCII terminal or via a SLIP connection through TELNET or a RADview networking management station e MNG Port Dial out port for alarm reporting e ETHERNET Port Manage a local Kilomux over a LAN TELNET or a RADview networking management station connected to the LAN can configure or operate Kilomux Kilomux requires an IP address For information on assigning an IP address refer to the DEF AGENT command in the Command Set Description appendix Remote Management Kilomuxes are connected via a link One Kilomux is local and the other is remote Remote management operates and configures the remote Kilomux The management of a
20. only one of the two ports of the KCL 2 module can be used for management access NMS_SLIP the network port connects to an SNMP management station and or TELNET host using the SLIP protocol AGENT_SLIP The network port is connected to another agent port using the SLIP protocol NMS_PPP Same as NMS SLIP except the PPP protocol is used AGENT_PPP Same as AGENT_SLIP except the PPP protocol is used ROUTING PROTOCOL DEF PWD Controls the transmission of routing tables which allows management traffic to be routed through the network port Purpose NONE Routing not supported PROPRIET Routing of management traffic by means of the RAD proprietary protocol Define the user password remember that the user password can only be used when the PSWRD switch located on the KCL module is set to OFF 1 F 26 Commands Format EF PWD Use To define the user password type DEF PWD lt ENTER gt Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual DEF ROUTE CU KM2100 gt def RR ENT RO Appendix F Command Set Description The password entry screen appears e g PASSWORD 4 to 8 CHARS ENT PASSWORD password 2 Type the required password spaces are recognized as valid characters in a password The password appears on the second line 3 Carefully check that the specified password has been indeed typed in and then press ENTER The new passwor
21. required main link data rate The modems provide the transmit and receive clock signals to the Kilomux units In this configuration the modem connected to one of the Kilomux units is selected to provide the timing reference for the whole link by selecting its INTERNAL timing mode The other modem is set to operate in the LOOPBACK timing mode thereby ensuring that both Kilomux units derive their timing reference from the same source 1 40 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information DDS Network Master Clock In the digital configuration B of Figure 1 28 two Kilomux units communicate through a digital transmission network e g a national or private carrier network or an ISDN network in the latter case the connection is usually made by means of KML 10 main link modules Digital data and ISDN networks usually incorporate very accurate timing sources which are always preferable In many cases these networks will not accept data at a rate that differs from their own rate In the digital configuration the modems that connect the Kilomux units to the digital data network are set to operate in the LOOPBACK timing mode This ensures that the two Kilomux units derive their timing reference from the accurate master clock provided by the network When operating in the DTE timing mode buffers are used in the receive and transmit data paths to allow retiming and to ab
22. service Figure G 11 Switched backup on ISDN G 5 Advanced Point to Point Applications Tail End Application modem A modem B modem C modem D Figure G 12 Tail End Application Tail End with DTE2 Clocking KM A KM B modem A modem B router LAN LAN Figure G 13 Tail End with DTE2 Clocking Advanced Point to Point Applications G 5 Appendix G Kilomux Application Guide Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Back to Back with DTE2 Clocking modem A modem C modem D Figure G 14 Back to Back with DTE2 Clocking LAN to LAN Connection modem A LAN A koax Figure G 15 LAN to LAN Connection LAN Connection to External Router Figure G 16 LAN Connection to External Router G 6 Dual Link Applications Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix G Kilomux Application Guide G 6 Dual Link Applications V configuration modem A modem B router i Figure G 17 V configuration Switched Backup on Dial Up Line KM A leased line leased line KM B modem A modem B dial up dial up PBX modem A modem B Figure G 18 Switched Backup on Dial Up Line Main Link Redundancy modemA Figure G 19 Main Link Redundancy Dual Link Applications G 7 Appendix G Kilomux Application Guide Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual G 8 Dual Li
23. terminal refer to Appendix B Alarms The initial configuration of a Kilomux must always be performed by means of a supervision terminal connected to its supervisory port using the procedures described in the System Installation and Setup chapter However after initial configuration Kilomux can also be managed by means of a RADview network management station For RADview management procedures refer to the RADview PC TDM User s Manual 4 2 Kilomux Supervision Language The following presents the Kilomux supervision language syntax usage and commands Command Language Syntax e Commands can be entered only when the Kilomux supervisory port prompt is displayed The prompt always appears at the beginning of a new line and the cursor appears to the right of the prompt e The prompt identifies the database being edited When you are working on the currently active database the prompt is KM2100 gt for Kilomux 2100 KM2104 gt for Kilomux 2104 When you are working on the alternate database the prompt is ALT_DB gt Kilomux Supervision Language 4 1 Chapter 4 Operation Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Commands are case insensitive e g you can type commands in either lower case and or upper case letters To correct typing errors press the BACKSPACE key until the error is cleared and then retype the correct command Use a space as a separator between command fields and or parameters Commands m
24. the tested channel is disconnected from the user data equipment and its DSR line is turned off 5 10 Diagnostic Tests Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Diagnostics Tone Injection The test tone is a data sequence repeating at a rate of 1 kHz This data sequence is identical to the data sequence that would have been generated if a 1 kHz signal having a nominal level of 1 mW 0 dBm0 were applied to the input of the channel codec The test tone is connected directly to the output of the tested channel transmit path instead of transmitting the subscriber transmit signal The tone can be connected to only one channel of a voice module at a time Tone injection automatically disconnects the local subscriber signal Figure 5 7 shows the signal paths User or Test Equipment User or Test Equipment V O Modules Remote KILOMUX KILOMUX Figure 5 7 Voice I O Module Test Tone Injection Path Diagnostic Tests 5 11 Chapter 5 Diagnostics Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 5 12 Diagnostic Tests Appendix A Connection Data A 1 Scope This appendix provides information on the type and pin allocation of the interface connectors installed on the various Kilomux modules In the direction field the following conventions are used e IN input to Kilomux e OUT output from Kilomux A 2 Supervisory Port Connector The module supervision connector is a 9 pin D type fem
25. 1 47 Timing Modes of ISDN Channels assicuri aine aa A NS 1 48 SUB Lite TIMIDE ives sagteendscdesnestosducwseseeuntanns Weeiveosicernesag EAEE E ARTENE 1 49 Main Link Interface Characteristics 0 cece seseesceseseeeseeesceaecaeeseseaecaaesaesesnaetaesesseaeeaes 1 49 Te VO Mod le Applicatio S assisen esne ee a t 1 52 1 5 Technical System Characteristics os sisaadaidivan snieiivvngdiuisionminieseunndulivengdbejaanetaio nga Aaandeieinen 1 53 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual i Table of Contents Chapter 2 Installation ZA MPGUICTION sa sotaasta cones dehotainsdecsih epant inne uioasgadeanseodense teandeaaseogeustand sua inusenaeatandadtanoneteunsdanes 2 1 2 2 Site Requirements and Prerequisites lt lt asuswsvississend wes acs daw ade ntendaalwansceranienacnwnenes 2 2 input Power REQUIFEIMENES sscsssesveaadoeseessosdsaaapousutes saevusaadoessunanooasndanounvaihoon ised aacuuaihtoutieasocdys 2 2 SLIT pressona aa en a a e E e eaa A E EEAS AR AAS AEE SE nani 2 2 Channel Connection Considerations ssiesicsssrsniiresir nienean ni i 2 3 Front and Rear Panel Clearance ina niecnrecinniritia naani a A AAA ERE 2 3 Ambient Reguirenmemts sonidir isian aaa A E ET AA TE OO A CAITER 2 3 Electromagnetic Compatibility Considerations ss sssssssssesessessiseteessrsitttetrstnteresersrrrisnsenete 2 3 Current and Power Requirements of Kilomux Power Supply Modules cesses eee 2 3 Current and Power Capabilities of Kilomu
26. 16 1 26 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information KILOMUX 2100 In the application shown in Figure 1 16 the multidrop channel of the KDI module is used to connect between the host computer connected to a data channel of a KLS 1 NEW module installed in Kilomux 2100 situated at the central site and several data terminals located at other locations The communication is based on a polled protocol whereby the host operates as the master and arbitrates the traffic on the multidrop link by addressing the DTE s one at a time The multidrop feature operates as follows e All the DTE s connected along the link can receive the data sent by the host because all the multidrop channels of all Kilomux 2100 are allocated bandwidth on link A In addition the bandwidth allocated to the multidrop channels is also designated for bypassing to link B to enable all the downstream DTE s to receive the host e When a DTE connected to a KDI M module has data to transmit toward the host it must assert its RTS line The assertion of the RTS line in the multidrop channel interface changes the routing of the main link data by the corresponding KDI M module The KDI M module disconnects the bypassing connection of the multidrop channel data to main link B and the channel data is dropped locally As long as the RTS line is asserted the DTE remains connected to main link A j
27. 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual For modules with IP interfaces an adaptive timing mode is available This mode enables to recover clock from the Ethernet network interface System Supervision and Configuration 1 4 Note The Kilomux system is designed for unattended operation A complete collection of operating parameters configures the Kilomux system and each of its modules This collection of operating parameters is determined by a database This database is stored in the non volatile memory of the Kilomux control module Kilomux can store in two different databases a primary database and a backup database and can be configured to switch automatically between the databases in accordance with a predetermined daily schedule day night operation or to use one of the databases only in case of switching to a backup link Switching of the Kilomux to the backup database is enabled only when the Kilomux operates in switched backup mode Kilomux stores alarms detected during operation in a buffer The buffer stores alarms to be sent to a supervision terminal and can hold up to 100 alarms During regular operation a front panel indicator lights to indicate if there are any alarms in the alarm buffer The local operator can then review the contents of the alarm buffer and can delete old alarms related to events that are no longer present in the system In addition to the alarm buffer the front panel LED indicators display in
28. 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Satellite Application SAT station B SAT station A Figure G 2 Satellite Application G 3 CVS Applications Transmitting Full Digital Trunk Figure G 3 Transmitting Full Digital Trunk Digital Trunk to Analog Conversion Figure G 4 Digital Trunk to Analog Conversion G 2 CVS Applications Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix G Kilomux Application Guide Digital Trunk with Protocol Conversion KM A KM B PBX r PBX Figure G 5 Digital Trunk with Protocol Conversion G 4 ISDN Applications Using ISDN Main Link on 128kbps Figure G 6 Using ISDN Main Link on 128kbps Transparent ISDN Connection KM A router LAN LAN Figure G 7 Transparent ISDN Connection ISDN Applications G 3 Appendix G Kilomux Application Guide Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual ISDN Voice Over ISDN Main Link KM A ISDN PBX Figure G 8 ISDN Voice Over ISDN Main Link Connection on Demand with Data switched ISDN service router Figure G 9 Connection on Demand with Data Connection on Demand with Voice switched ISDN service Figure G 10 Connection on Demand with Voice G 4 ISDN Applications Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix G Kilomux Application Guide Switched backup on ISDN switched ISDN
29. AWG or larger telecommunication line cords Attention Pour r duire les risques s incendie utiliser seulement des conducteurs de t l communications 26 AWG ou de section sup rieure Some ports are suitable for connection to intra building or non exposed wiring or cabling only In such cases a notice will be given in the installation instructions Do not attempt to tamper with any carrier provided equipment or connection hardware Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC The equipment is designed and approved to comply with the electromagnetic regulations of major regulatory bodies The following instructions may enhance the performance of the equipment and will provide better protection against excessive emission and better immunity against disturbances A good earth connection is essential When installing the equipment in a rack make sure to remove all traces of paint from the mounting points Use suitable lock washers and torque If an external grounding lug is provided connect it to the earth bus using braided wire as short as possible The equipment is designed to comply with EMC requirements when connecting it with unshielded twisted pair UTP cables However the use of shielded wires is always recommended especially for high rate data In some cases when unshielded wires are used ferrite cores should be installed on certain cables In such cases special instructions are provided in the manual Disconnect all wires which are no
30. CLR LOOP L ML A lt ENTER gt Commands F 3 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 2 To deactivate a specific type of loop on main link B type CLR LOOP L ML B lt ENTER gt or CLR LOOP R ML B lt ENTER gt or CLR LOOP V54 2 ML B lt ENTER gt or CLR LOOP V54 3 ML B lt ENTER gt or 3 To deactivate all the loops of a certain main link type For main link A C1 For main link B CI Li R LP ML A lt ENT G iR gt R LP ML B lt ENT G R gt CLR LP L ML B lt ENTER gt CLR LP R ML B lt ENTER gt CLR LP V54 2 ML B lt ENTER gt CLR LP V54 3 ML B lt ENTER gt or CLR LOOP ML A lt ENTER gt or CLR LOOP ML B lt ENTER gt 4 To deactivate a specific type of channel loop or test type O CAO GO iR gt R gt R LOOP L i j lt ENTER gt or CLR LP L i j lt ENTER gt R LOOP R i j lt ENTER gt or CLR LP R i j lt ENTER gt R LOOP PRBS_INJ i j lt ENTER gt or CLR LP PRBS _ INJ i j lt ENTE R LOOP TONE INJ i j lt ENTER gt or CLR LP TONE INJ i j lt ENTE R LOOP BERT i j lt ENTER gt or
31. CLR LP BERT i j lt ENTER gt Note data channel only voice channel only data channel only If the desired module is a module for which it is not possible to loops or tests on a specific channel e g a KLS 2 module type an asterisk instead of the channel number B 5 To deactivate all the channel loop and tests type EN T CLR LOOP i j lt ER gt or CLR LP J lt ENT ER gt j Use the asterisk under the conditions explained above You will see the time and date followed by the Kilomux prompt CLR MONITOR F 4 Purpose Deactivate the monitoring of an I O module channel Format CLR MONITOR Use CLR MON or CLR M TOR lt ENT ER gt or To deactivate the monitoring of the currently selected I O channel type CLR M lt ENT ER gt You will see the time and date followed by the Kilomux prompt Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description CONNECT SWITCH Note Note Purpose Dials and connects to the remote Kilomux from the local Kilomux s main link over the ISDN switch line when the following is true e The Kilomux s main link is configured to manual operation and switch mode refer to DEF ML command e The system is in switch mode refer to DEF SYS command The link will be connected until the DISCONNECT
32. Connections to KML Options I O Modules and Ringers Refer to the corresponding module ringer Installation and Operation Manual Kilomux 2104 Rear Panel Figure 2 6 shows a typical rear view of the Kilomux 2104 enclosure and identifies the I O slots Table 2 7 explains the components located on the Kilomux 2104 rear panel FF Figure 2 6 Kilomux 2104 Enclosure Typical Rear View Interfaces and Connections 2 19 Chapter 2 Installation No Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table 2 7 Kilomux 2104 Rear Panel Components Item Power connector with integral fuse in AC version only Label POWER switch RST push button ALM indicator TST indicator CONTROL connector MNG connector Description Connector for the Kilomux 2104 input power Indicates the nominal operating voltage of the Kilomux 2104 and the fuse rating Turns the power on off Pressing the RST push button causes the reinitialization of all the modules in the Kilomux enclosure Indicates that a fault has been detected in one of the Kilomux modules Indicates that a test or test loop is being performed on one of the local Kilomux modules or on the main link modem When downloading is activated the TEST indicator lights when a test is activated by the remote Kilomux modules 9 pin D type female connector for connection to an optional ASCII
33. DCE the DSR line can also be configured to be continuously ON However if the DTR line switches to OFF the DSR line will also switch to OFF for 5 seconds In addition Kilomux always switches the DSR line OFF inactive for 5 seconds when the EXIT command is executed and when the disconnect time out expires AUTOBAUD Function When the AUTOBAUD function is enabled Kilomux can identify the rate of incoming data by analyzing the timing of three consecutive pairs of Carriage Return and Line Feed characters generated by pressing three times the carriage return key The detected data rate is then used for the current communication session The automatic baud rate identification procedure is performed or repeated whenever three consecutive carriage returns are received after one of the following events occurs e The DTR line has been switched OFF e The EXIT command has been executed e The idle disconnect time out expired because no data has been exchanged with the supervision terminal 2 10 Equipment Needed Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation In case one of these events occurred Kilomux assumes that the current communication session has been terminated Therefore when the password protection is enabled the password must be entered again before the supervision terminal can resume communication with Kilomux The AUTOBAUD function cannot be used with the RADview station and therefore when RADv
34. DDRESS 1 IS t 999 999 999 999 ET MASK 1 IS 999 9 99 999 9 99 Press ENTER to proceed to the next lines Repeat the above procedure to define additional management stations 2 through 10 The current list in the following format appears ENT MANAGERS LIST PARAMETE ESS 1 IS ne 19 9 9 MASK 1 IS pe 999 ESS 2 IS I 9 99 MASK 2 IS r 999 ESS 3 IS r 999 MASK 3 IS i 999 DDRESS 10 IS ET MASK 10 IS Purpose Define main link parameters The applicable parameters depend on the type of main link module and on the main link mode Refer to the relevant module Installation and Operation Manual for a complete listing of the available parameters and for typical parameter data forms for each type of main link module Format DEF ML A B Commands F 19 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual DEF ML CALL F 20 Commands Use 1 If the main link mode is SINGLE type DEF ML lt ENTER gt This command defines the parameters of the installed module irrespective of the enclosure slot in which it is located slot 3 for main link A or slot 4 for main link B 2 To define the parameters of main link A in a dual link configuration type DEF ML lt ENTER gt or DEF ML A lt ENTER gt 3 To define the parameters of main link B in a dual link confi
35. EGAL COMMAND ALT E DATA BASE IS ACTIV The command entered by you is not supported on the alternate database only DEF commands are supported ERROR 39 EGAL COMMAND FOR CURRENT SYST The command entered by you is not supported by the Kilomux 2104 ERROR 41 EGAL COMMAND NO CONNECTED CHANN You are trying to enter a command that is supported only when the channel specified in the command is connected B 12 Configuration Error Messages Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual ERROR 42 Appendix B Alarms CONFLICT IN FRAME MODE AND DOWNLOAD You can select manual frame bit allocation only when downloading is disabled LEGAL FRAME ALLOCATION An incorrect bit allocation has been detected i e the same bits have been assigned to different channels or the specified start or end bit number is invalid LEGAL LINK CLOCK AND ML MODE COMBINATION You can select the main link clock source only when using the dual link or priority bumping mode provided a KDI module is installed in the Kilomux LEGAL LINK CLOCK AND ML TIMING COMBINATION When selecting one main link as main link cannot be DTE or LBT the clock source the timing mode of the other If both main links use LBT or DTE timing the LINK_CLK parameter must be set to NONE IP ADDRESS AND GATEWAY ARE NOT AT
36. ENTER gt e To display all the local Kilomux alarms and then clear all the alarms type DSP ALM CA lt ENTER gt Display Format A header precedes each block of alarms received from a Kilomux The header lists the Kilomux node number and name and it serves as an easily identified separator between the alarms transmitted by different Kilomux units The contents of the alarm buffer are displayed as a table with four columns ALARM NUMBER ALARM SYNTAX ALARM STATE and ALARM OCCURRENCE TIME For a description of the alarm messages that can be displayed by the terminal refer to the Alarms appendix Commands F 33 Appendix F Command Set Description DSP BERT Purpose Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Display the result of the BER test running on the specified I O module channel Format DSP BERT i j C Use 1 To display the current result of the BER test type DSP BERT i j lt ENTER gt If for the selected module e g for a KLS 2 module only the composite channel BER test can be performed type an asterisk instead of the channel number in all the following commands For example DSP BERT i lt ENTER gt The terminal displays the current value of the BERT counter of the specified channel The BERT count range is 0 through 65535 If the maximum value is reached the counter holds this value until cleared see
37. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information Out of Band A remote Kilomux can be managed out of band via e Amodem e An Ethernet connection refer to Figure 1 24 e Dedicated time slot in KML 7 or KML 8 An unused time slot in the KML 7 T1 network or KML 8 E1 network is assigned to pass the management information e Time slot O in KML 8 E1 network or f bit in KML 7 T1 network is assigned to pass management information Management information is not included in the data frame KILOMUX Ethernet Port Ethernet Port Ei Supervision Terminal or TELNET or SNMP Figure 1 24 Remote Management Out of Band Neighbor Management You can configure a Kilomux without a direct connection to a RADview Network Management Station or TELNET or SNMP and without using out of band management Neighbor management allows management information to be sent via a SLIP connection to linked Kilomuxes Kilomuxes are connected from the Network Port NP DTE on one Kilomux to the Supervisory Port SP DCE on another Kilomux TELNET SNMP or a RADview management network station is connected via SLIP to the SP DCE port on the first Kilomux in the link Each Kilomux has an IP address Management information is sent via the SLIP connection to a particular Kilomux in the link using the IP address of the Kilomux DXC FCD or MEGAPLEX equipment can also be linked to the Kilomuxes The following examples illustrate possible c
38. MIBs can also be organized in a similar structure under the supervision of the Internet Activities Board IAB any parameter included in a MIB that is recognized by the IAB is uniquely defined To provide the flexibility necessary in a global structure MIBs are classified into various branches one of them being the experimental branch and another the private enterprise specific branch Under the private branch of MIBs each enterprise manufacturer can be assigned a number The assigned number designates the top of an enterprise specific sub tree of non standard MIBs Within this context RAD has been assigned the enterprise number 164 Therefore enterprise MIBs published by RAD can be found under 1 3 6 1 4 1 164 MIBs of general interest are published by the IAB in the form of a Request for Comment RFC document In addition MIBs are also often assigned informal names that reflect their primary purpose Enterprise specific MIBs are published and distributed by their originator who is responsible for their contents SNMP Environment Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C SNMP Management MIBs Supported by the Kilomux SNMP Agent The interpretation of the relevant MIBs is a function of the SNMP agent of each managed entity The general Kilomux SNMP agent currently supports RFC 1213 the standard MIB II In addition the Kilomux SNMP agent supports the RAD private enterprise specific MIB identified as
39. Panel Indicators Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation 4 4 Operating Instructions The Kilomux is operated through the supervision terminal Supervision Terminal Before using the supervision terminal make sure the preparations listed in the Initial Setup and Configuration section in the System Installation and Setup chapter were completed and all the relevant equipment has been turned on Power Up During the power up procedure Kilomux automatically sends information through its supervisory port to allow the monitoring of the power up self test from a supervision terminal Upon power up the supervision terminal displays EL gt Kilomux SUPERVISORY PORT ON LINE E H FOR HE where lt BEL gt stands for the graphic symbol of the lt BEL gt code ASCII 07 While the KCL module performs the power up self test the supervision terminal displays CL Board Self Test In Progress After the self test is completed the result OK or FAILED is added to the displayed line Kilomux starts reading the installed modules and the supervision terminal displays After the reading is completed the state of the installed modules is displayed in the following format OO eWNER C O C O H OIHDOBWNE OArATAORWNHE NANNAN NANNAN NAN NANANA N NNN NAAN SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI SI If you see FAILED for any mod
40. Power Input Connector A 4 DCD 2 10 DCD_DEL E 8 DCE Timing 1 42 Description Functional 1 1 Diagnostics Capabilities 1 6 LED 5 1 ML 5 1 Dial Port Connector 1 38 Downloading Procedure General D 3 DP Connector A 3 DSR 2 10 E 8 DSR amp CTS 3 4 E 4 DTE Timing 1 40 DTR 2 9 Dual Link Operation Basic Dual Link Configurations 1 22 Bypassing Configurations 1 23 Multidrop Configurations 1 26 DWLD_BW_A E 2 DWLD_BW_A DWLD_BW B 3 3 DWLD_BW_B E 2 E Ending a Control Session 4 12 Equipment Management Methods General 1 33 In Band 1 34 Local Management 1 33 Out of Band 1 35 Remote Management 1 33 Error Messages Configuration B 9 Ethernet Port 1 38 External DCE Timing 1 41 f Features Main System 1 1 FRAME E 5 Front Panel Controls and Indicators 4 7 KILOMUX 2100 1 8 KILOMUX 2104 1 10 Operating Instructions See Front Panel Operating Instructions Front Panel Operating Instructions Front Panel Controls and Indicators 4 7 General 3 1 FUNCTION E 5 Functional Description Diagnostic Capabilities 1 6 General 1 1 Main System Features 1 1 System Supervision and Configuration 1 4 6 General Configuration Procedure 3 2 General Information Application Considerations 1 16 Functional Description 1 1 Grounding 2 2 H Handshaking Protocol AUTOBAUD Function 2 10 Clear to Send CTS 2 10 Data Carrier Detect DCD 2 10 Data Set Ready DSR 2 10 Data Terminal Ready DTR 2 9
41. User or Test Equipment User or Test Equipment I O Modules Local Remote KILOMUX KILOMUX Figure 5 6 I O Module Remote Loop on Individual Channel Diagnostic Tests 5 9 Chapter 5 Diagnostics Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual PRBS Transmission The PRBS transmission function is used to provide a test signal to a channel of a data I O module By activating a local or remote main link loop or a remote channel loop or by connecting an external loop while PRBS transmission is activated this function can also be used to obtain a qualitative evaluation of data transmission without using external test equipment Data transmission is checked by applying a 2 1 511 bit pseudo random sequence generated by an internal test sequence generator to the input of the tested channel transmit path The transmitted data is returned by means of a loop somewhere along the data path e g by connecting a remote channel loop if downloading is enabled or a local main link loop to the receive path of the module The received signal is routed to a test sequence evaluator The evaluator compares the received data bit by bit to the original data and detects any difference bit error The output of the evaluator is sampled during module polling to check whether errors were detected in the interval between consecutive pollings The test results are displayed as follows e On the LCD located on the Kilomux fron
42. address and a subnet mask The IP router will learn only addresses of agent IP addresses which when viewed through the mask match the subnet IP address Therefore the IP router can be instructed to learn only IP addresses of Kilomux units within predefined subnetworks In the example of Figure C 2 Kilomux units in network A need only learn the addresses of other units in the same network and those of units in network B the same is true for the units in networks C and B Each pair of subnet IP address and subnet mask is called a net entry and is assigned a unique ID The range of ID s is 1 through 255 IP Environment C 7 Appendix C SNMP Management Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual C8 Note Note SNMP Traps C 4 SNMP Traps The SNMP agent of the Kilomux supports the MIB II authentication trap and in addition generates the following enterprise specific traps e Each alarm message e The result of each sanity check The following commands are used to set the SNMP traps e DEF AGENT e DEF NAME e DEF MANAGER LIST After using DEF AGENT you must reset Kilomux Identifying a remote agent takes about 1 minute Appendix D Software Download D 1 Scope This section presents procedures for installing new software upgrade releases in the KCL 2 module The KCL 2 module stores the software in Flash memory The software is stored in compressed format and is decompressed and loaded into the module RAM
43. and Operation Manual ERROR 01 ERROR 02 ERROR 03 ERROR 04 ERROR 05 ERROR 06 Appendix B Alarms B 2 Configuration Error Messages The Kilomux provides configuration error messages for the LCD and for the supervision terminal e The configuration error messages displayed on the LCD have the format COMFIG ERROR followed by a numerical code e The configuration messages have the format ERROR followed by the numerical code and a concise textual description of the error condition The error messages are explained below LEGAL MASTI ER CLOCK SOURCE CARD TIMING SPEE Illegal source for a master clock timing reference source the selected channel is not operating in the DTE2 mode EGAL FALLBACK CLOCK SOURCE CARD TIMING SPEE Illegal source for a fallback clock timing reference source the selected channel is not operating in the DTE2 mode ILLEGAL ML LOOP COMBINATION You are trying to activate simultaneously local and main link loops or both types of ITU T Rec V 54 main link loops LOOP 2 and LOOP 3 This combination is not allowed refer to the Diagnostics chapter EGAL I O MODULE LOOP COMBINATION You are trying to activate simultaneously both a local and remote loop or PRBS transmission or BERT test or tone injection on the same channel None of these combinations are allowed refer to the Diagnostics chapter
44. assess a e a UaNeT ES 4 4 4 3 Kilomux Controls Connectors and Indicators sssessessseessssssessrineisesseserrerssssssessrerrersssessene 4 8 vi Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information 1 1 Functional Description Kilomux is an advanced highly versatile user configurable modular TDM Time Division Multiplex system Kilomux provides an efficient and cost effective method for transmitting data voice and fax over digital data services Access to these services is provided over a variety of standard interfaces V 35 RS 530 V 36 RS 232 V 24 X 21 Standard DDS co directional G 703 ISDN fiber optic T1 E1 and IP at data rates ranging from 9 6 to 1536 kbps Bandwidth utilization efficiency is 98 5 Main System Features The Kilomux system can be equipped with various types of input output I O modules that provide the required interface for the user data fax and voice channels The range of available Kilomux modules is continuously expanding The series of I O modules includes e High speed synchronous data modules operating at a rate of 2 4 through 614 4 kbps the KHS series of modules e Low speed data modules 300 bps to 57 6 kbps or 64 kbps synchronous and asynchronous data channels including statistical multiplexing modules the KLS series of modules e ISDN interface modules the KHS U series and KVF 4 SO series e 2W and 4W multiple voice channel interface mod
45. at the central site Fully digital transmission for bypassing voice channels is an essential requirement to the preservation of high quality voice reproduction when low bit rate voice compression is used because it eliminates back to back analog interconnections at intermediate locations and the ensuing analog to digital and digital to analog conversions Full digital transmission has significant advantages for data channels as well because it does away with the cables that would otherwise be required for the connection of data channels and provides the equivalent of an electronic cross connect function programmable by the same means used to control the operation of Kilomux 2100 Multidrop Configurations The KDI M module version includes a data channel interface for multidrop configurations The multidrop channel is compatible with the data channels of the KLS 1 NEW low speed data module and supports data rates in the range of 0 3 to 64 kbps As is standard practice in a multidrop application the receive path of the local multidrop channel continuously receives the traffic carried in the allocated bandwidth on the desired main link e g link A and in addition the same data is also bypassed to the other link to make it available downstream The transmit path of the multidrop channel is connected to main link A only when the RTS line in the local interface is asserted A typical bypassing and multidrop configuration is shown in Figure 1
46. can be used to test the proper operation of the Kilomux system and identify efficiently the faulty components The available functions are e Connection of a local or remote test loop on the main link e Connection of a local or remote test loop on the modem serving the main link provided the modem supports the ITU T Rec V 54 control pins e Connection of a local or remote test loop on the desired I O module channel e Pseudo random sequence PRBS transmission on a selected channel of a data I O module e Bit error rate test BERT on a selected channel of a data I O module using a pseudo random sequence Diagnostic Tests 5 3 Chapter 5 Diagnostics Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Caution Note Caution e Injection of 1 kHz 0 dBm0 digital milliwatt audio signal for testing the transmit path of the desired voice I O module channel Note that no tests are available for the KCL 2 module because this module controls the management interface i e the front panel controls and the interfacing with a supervision terminal or RADview network management station and the Kilomux operation Therefore the KCL 2 module is inherently tested when a proper response is obtained to any operator request and the Kilomux operates normally If it is necessary to replace the KCL 2 module you can preserve the existing database in two ways e The fastest way is to remove the NVRAM component from the replaced module
47. equipment requirements refer to Site Requirements in the System Installation and Setup chapter 3 Check the power supply rating considerations refer to Power Supply Rating Considerations in the System Installation and Setup chapter 4 Install the Kilomux enclosure refer to Installation and Setup in the System Installation and Setup chapter 5 Install an additional KPS module if necessary refer to Installation and Setup in the System Installation and Setup chapter 6 Install the KM RINGER module refer to Installation and Setup in the System Installation and Setup chapter 7 Connect the power cable the KM RINGER module the Supervisory Port KCL 2 module the KML module option modules and I O modules refer to Interfaces and Connections in the System Installation and Setup chapter 8 Set the IP address using the DEF AGENT refer to DEF AGENT in the Command Set Description appendix 2 Operating Kilomux To operate Kilomux for more detailed instructions refer to Operating Instructions in the Operation chapter 1 If Kilomux 2100 includes a KM RINGER module set the KM RINGER module power switch to OFF 2 Turn on Kilomux by setting the ON OFF switches on the rear panels to ON 3 Check the front panel indications refer to Operating Instructions in the Operation chapter 4 If Kilomux 2100 includes a KM RINGER module turn it on by setting its POWER switch to ON Verify that the RING VOLTAGE and BATTERY VOL
48. for local control signal support data channel only RTS Channel configured for end to end transmission of RTS line state data channel only DTR amp RTS Channel configured for end to end transmission of DTR and RTS lines states data channel only SIGNALING Channel configured for end to end transmission of E and M signaling voice channel only N A Not applicable displayed in lines with COMP i DSP FLIP Purpose Display the cause of the last switching flip from one main link to the other This command is accepted only when Kilomux operates in the switched backup priority bumping or redundancy mode Format DSP FLIP Use e Type DSP FLIP lt ENTER gt Commands F 35 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual DSP HDR TST F 36 Commands The following message is displayed LAST FLIP CAUSED BY cause The following cause descriptions can be displayed NO FLIP No flip occurred FORCED FLIP Flipping occurred as a result of operator s command FLIP ML ML CTS OR DSR IS OFF Flipping occurred because the CTS or DSR line in the interface of the KML module serving the previously used link had been switched off by the modem This cause can appear only when the DSR amp CTS main link parameter is set to EXT ML HARDWARE FAILURE Flipping occurred after a hardware failure has been detected in the KML module serving th
49. g g g g g The manual as a whole g g g g g What did you like about the manual Error Report Type of Error s Incompatibility with product or Problem s Difficulty in understanding text Regulatory information Safety Compliance Warnings etc Difficulty in finding needed information Missing information Illogical flow of information Style spelling grammar references etc Appearance Other GE OleOle Please list the exact page numbers with the error s detail the errors you found information missing unclear or inadequately explained etc and attach the page to your fax if necessary Please add any comments or suggestions you may have You are Distributor End user VAR Other Od 0 OU Who is your distributor Your name and company Job title Address Direct telephone number and extension Fax number E mail data communications www rad com INTERNATIONAL HEADQUARTERS 24 Raoul Wallenberg Street Tel Aviv 69719 Israel Tel 972 3 6458181 Fax 972 3 6498250 972 3 6474436 Email market rad com U S HEADQUARTERS 900 Corporate Drive Mahwah N J 07430 Tel 201 529 1100 Toll Free 1 800 444 7234 Fax 201 529 5777 Email market radusa com Publication No 425 200 11 04
50. j depends on the number of configurable channels of the module installed in the specified slot 2 To define the parameters of all the module channels type DEF CH i lt ENTER gt The data form of the selected module or module channel is displayed The form presents the current parameter values as defaults 3 Change the parameters as follows F 12 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by pressing the space bar To change the selected field press F or B to scroll among the available selections When the desired selection is displayed press the space bar to move to the next field 4 After the desired parameter values are selected press ENTER to end Kilomux displays the time and date fields followed by the Kilomux prompt DEF CON Purpose Define the main link to be used by each I O module The command is relevant only for dual link configurations and switch mode When using the priority bumping or switched backup mode this command is also used to define the priority of each module Format DEF CON Use 1 Type DEF CON lt ENTER gt The main link selection screen is displayed The screen lists the I O slots including the options slot and the main link currently used by each I O slot A typical display is shown below KM2100 def con ED HIGHWAY P
51. logic to KVF 6 or KVF 8 module installed in the Kilomux type 2 Load IO i KCL lt ENTER gt where i is the I O slot number 1 through 12 Wait until the TST LED in the card starts to blink The system will load the software automatically from the KCL through the internal BUS LOAD ML A B LOOP F 54 Commands Purpose Software download to or KML 11 modules through a DL connection in the modules front panel or from the KCL Common Logic card Format LOAD ML i DL or LOAD ML i KCL Use To perform software download to KML 11 module installed in the Kilomux type 1 Load ML i lt ENTER gt where i stands for A for module A and B for module B 2 Wait until KCL 2 finishes transferring the new KML 11 software through the internal bus Purpose Activate tests For main link test loops you can define their duration after the specified time the loop is automatically disconnected If you do not specify the loop duration it remains permanently connected e Refer to the Diagnostics chapter for the allowable loop combinations e Refer to the Diagnostics chapter for a description of the loops available on the Kilomux main link e Refer to the relevant module Installation and Operation Manual for a description of the tests available on the corresponding module Format LOOP loopname ML A ML B i j or LP loopname ML A ML B i j or LP R ML A MLB i j T Use 1 To activate a specific type of lo
52. modem that supports this function the remote modem returns the receive signal toward the local modem therefore the local Kilomux transmit signal is returned to the receive path The loop signal path is shown in Figure 5 4 Diagnostic Tests 5 7 Chapter 5 Diagnostics Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual User or Test Equipment Local Modem 1 0 Modules Local KILOMUX 2100 User or Test Equipment I O Modules Remote KILOMUX 2100 Figure 5 4 Main Link Modem Loop 2 Signal Path Main Link Modem Loop 2 Normal Indications and Fault Location e The TEST indicator of the Kilomux lights e The TXD and RXD indicators of the local Kilomux must light and the LOCAL SYNC LOSS indicator must be off If not the connections and or the link between the two modems or the modems are defective I O Module Loops and Tests The tests available for I O modules depend on the module type however in general all the I O modules support local and remote channel loops and the monitoring of the transmit and receive activity and of the main control signals by means of the front panel indicators In addition the Kilomux supports module specific tests e For data I O modules the Kilomux provides PRBS transmission and BERT testing on individual channels PRBS transmission allows supplying a test signal to a data channel and the BERT test provides a quick qualitative check of transmission performance without
53. number from which a call is expected For slave configuration 128K calls If both 64K calls are expected from a remote KML 10 which is configured with one directory number as in the ETSI standard or has one abstract terminal use only the FIRST BACKUP SUB ADDRESS and FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER For the US standard if the calling number is composed of two abstract terminals enter the first expected number in the FIRST BACKUP SUB ADDRESS and FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER and the second in the SECOND BACKUP SUB ADDRESS and SECOND BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER 3 After the desired selections are made press ENTER to end The supervision terminal displays the time and date fields followed by the Kilomux 2100 prompt Data Form for Other Module Types A typical data form for a main module which is not a KML 10 module is shown below BACKUP MODE CALL TIME OUT SW_BACKUP_DB PSTN 60 sec ONLINE The display fields are as follows e BACKUP_MODE Defines the type of switched channel PSTN Public switched telephone network In this mode Kilomux 2100 assumes that analog modems are used ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network In this mode Kilomux 2100 assumes direct connection to a B channel of a basic rate ISDN line usi
54. of the KDI module contains planning forms to help you in the allocation task 3 When the allocation is completed press ENTER The supervision terminal will display the time and date fields followed by the Kilomux prompt 4 To verify the allocation use the DSP ST FRAME command DEF MANAGER LIST Purpose Define or modify the network management stations to which the SNMP agent of Kilomux sends traps You can define up to five managers Each network management station is defined by entering its IP address and the corresponding subnet mask Format DEF MANAGER LIST F 18 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual DEF ML 1 Appendix F Command Set Description Use To define a management station type DEF MANAGER LIST lt ENTER gt The first line of the managers list data form appears This is used to define the IP address of the first management station Type in the IP address of the desired management station Use the dotted quad format four groups of digits ranging from 1 through 255 separated by periods After filling in the required address press ENTER The next line is displayed Type in the subnet mask in the dotted quad format The mask consists of four groups of digits ranging from 1 through 255 separated by periods The net section must consist of 1 s After defining the first management station a typical data form appears as
55. over the KM 2100 s back plane and converts it into IP frames Fiber Optic Link Interface Module KML F The fiber optic link interface of the KML F module uses a proprietary signaling format which ensures optimum performance To optimally meet a wide range of system requirements the fiber optic interface can be ordered for operation over 62 5 125 micron multi mode fibers typical attenuation 3 5 dB km as well as over low loss 9 125 micron single mode fibers typical attenuation 0 4 dB km Each option can be ordered with ST or FC PC connectors SMA connectors are also available at 850 nm Table 1 4 provides information on the characteristics of the optical interface Typical range is up to 4 5 km at 850 nm over multimode fiber up to 45 km at 1300 nm over single mode fiber with LED transmitters up to 60 km with 1300 nm laser transmitters and up to 100 km with 1550 nm laser transmitters Application Considerations 1 51 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table 1 4 KML F Fiber Optic Interface Characteristics Wavelength Fiber Type Transmitter Power Receiver Optical Maximum Receiver Type Coupled Sensitivity Budget Receiver Dynamic into Fiber Input Range Power 850 nm 62 5 125 um LED 18 dBm 38 dBm 20 dB 10 dBm 28 dB multi mode 1300 nm 9 125 um LED 18 dBm 40 dBm 22 dB 12 dBm 28 dB single mode Laser 12 dBm 40 dBm 28 dB 12dBm 28 dB 1550 nm 9 125 um Laser 12 dBm 40 dBm 28
56. read the following as a continuous string iso 1 org 3 dod 6 internet 1 private 4 enterprises 1 rad 164 radWAN 3 Enterprise specific MIBs supported by RAD equipment including Kilomux are available in ASN 1 format from the RAD Technical Support Department Management Domains Under SNMP SNMP enables in principle each management station that knows the MIBs supported by a device to perform all the management operations available on that device However this is not desirable in practical situations so it is necessary to provide a means to limit the management domains SNMP Communities To enable the delimitation of management domains SNMP uses communities Each community is identified by a name which is a case sensitive alphanumeric string defined by the user the Kilomux SNMP agents support community names of up to 8 characters Any SNMP entity this term includes both managed entities and management stations can be assigned by its user community names Access Restriction Using SNMP Communities In general SNMP agents support two types of access rights e Read only The SNMP agent accepts and processes only SNMP getRequest and getNextRequest commands from management stations which have the same read only community name e Read write The SNMP agent accepts and processes all the SNMP commands received from a management station with the same write community name For each SNMP entity it is possible to def
57. requiring external data transmission test equipment e For voice I O modules the Kilomux provides test tone injection The test tone can be heard by the subscribers connected to the voice channels thus providing a quick qualitative check of the voice path For specific information on the tests available for each I O module refer to the corresponding module Operation and Installation manual 5 8 Diagnostic Tests Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Diagnostics Local Channel Loop When a local loop is activated on a channel of an I O module the channel transmit signal is returned to the channel receive path The transmit signal is still connected to the transmit path and reaches the remote user While the loop is connected the local user equipment must receive its own signal The loop signal path is shown in Figure 5 5 This loop provides a quick check of the connections to the local user equipment Typical Module User or Test Equipment User or Test Equipment O Modules KILOMUX 2100 KILOMUX 2100 Figure 5 5 I O Module Local Loop on Individual Channel Remote Channel Loop The remote loop is connected on the local Kilomux unit i e the local I O module returns the receive signal of the tested channel toward the remote Kilomux The loop signal path is shown in Figure 5 6 This loop allows the remote user to perform a quick check of the end to end transmission on this channel
58. shown in Figure 5 7 User or Test Equipment 1 0 Modules Remote KILOMUX Local KILOMUX Figure 5 1 Local Main Link Loop Signal Path Local Main Link Loop Normal Indications and Fault Isolation e The TEST indicator of the local Kilomux lights e The TXD and RXD indicators of the local Kilomux must light If not the local Kilomux is defective e The SYNC LOSS indicator of the local Kilomux must be off If it lights the local Kilomux is defective Do not set up a local loop in a remote Kilomux with in band management Doing so could cause the main link connection to be lost Diagnostic Tests 5 5 Chapter 5 Diagnostics Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 5 6 Remote Main Link Loop As a rule connect the remote main link loop only if both Kilomuxes pass the local main link loop test successfully Remote Main Link Loop Signal Path The remote loop is connected on the local Kilomux unit i e the local KML module returns the received signal toward the remote Kilomux The loop signal path is shown in Figure 5 2 1 0 Modules I O Modules Remote KILOMUX KILOMUX Figure 5 2 Remote Main Link Loop Signal Paths Remote Main Link Loop Normal Indications and Fault Isolation e The TEST indicator of the local Kilomux lights e The TXD and RXD indicators of the local and remote Kilomux units must light and the LOCAL SYNC LOSS indicator of the remote Kilomux unit mu
59. supervisory port of Kilomux by entering the command DEF SP Refer to the Command Set Description appendix for more information You will see the supervisory port configuration data form A typical form with the default values is shown below PARITY NONE LOG OFF NO INTERE ACE DCE AUXIL ARY DE NMS SLIP After selecting the required parameters you may have to change the configuration of the supervision terminal to match the new values ENT command Refer to the Command Set Set the IP address using the DEF AG Description appendix for more information Then reset by pressing power on or by using the RESET LOC command 2 22 Initial Setup and Configuration General Chapter 3 Configuring Kilomux 3 1 Introduction In this chapter you will find detailed instructions for configuring Kilomux The information in this chapter includes e General description of Kilomux control and menu organization e Setting the configuration parameters for Kilomux Refer to the Operation chapter for a description of the Kilomux front panel and the syntax usage and commands of the Kilomux supervision language 3 2 Control of Kilomux Operation Kilomux operating mode is determined by a set of parameters stored in the internal non volatile memory of the KCL 2 module These parameters are selected by the user using a supervision terminal or the RAD
60. system as Required Figure 1 4 Kilomux 2100 Enclosure Rear View Kilomux 2100 Front Panel The front panel of the Kilomux 2100 enclosure includes labels for the show through areas for the status indicators located on each system module Note that the indicators are arranged in groups one group for each system module which are positioned before the corresponding module slot Figure 1 5 shows the front panel of the Kilomux 2100 enclosure Refer to the Operation chapter for a description of the front panel functions O ovune O wm P ALM TX B On POWER SUPPLY px rsr 0 RX RTS M LEAD SYSTEM STATUS Loca tos O DCD ELEAD RrEmoTE jos OQ B VOICE DATA CHANNEL MAIN LINK KILOMUX 2100 Figure 1 5 Kilomux 2100 Front Panel Kilomux 2104 General Description The Kilomux 2104 system consists of a 19 1U enclosure with 4 slots for the installation of I O modules All the modules are inserted through the rear panel The cable connections are also made through the rear panel The front panel includes an information section of status and alarm indicators The following figure shows a general view of a Kilomux 2104 enclosure 1 8 Physical Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information 4 I O Modules Figure 1 6 Kilomux 2104 Enclosure General View The Kilomux 2104 enclosure contains the control sub system the main lin
61. system is equipped with only one main link The Kilomux 2100 system can be equipped with two main link modules The two main link modules found only in the Kilomux 2100 system can be used in several ways e To provide hot standby redundancy backup for the main link with automatic or manual switchover in case one of the links fails For maximum flexibility Kilomux 2100 allows the preparation of a different configuration for use on the backup link The backup link can also use a switched data circuit The switched circuit can be established on a PSTN line using analog modems or on an ISDN line using an S or U interface e To provide two independent links from the same Kilomux 2100 enclosure The two links can operate at different data rates The dual link mode can also be used for providing the equivalent of hot standby protection to critical data channels by enabling the priority bumping feature e To provide multidrop and bypass capabilities using a dedicated KDI module In addition to main link redundancy the Kilomux 2100 system reliability can be further enhanced by installing an additional power supply unit in the enclosure The power supplies share the load current therefore when one of them fails or its input voltage is disconnected the other takes over the full load without disturbance to Kilomux 2100 operation The Kilomux system provides flexible system timing options with several main link and channel timing modes T
62. te ia S NEEN ae 1 31 1 20 Dual Switch Modenssiesistiitireeciocntiie iriti iein A ENa ASE a RE EE ERENNERT ENEAS 1 31 1 21 Single and Switch Mode sss sce cid sssri tieses ois eis iaar a a 1 32 1 22 Remote Management IB arid ipci vicssecnsseniaevcicrsvantuanasnaaigann tidnessel istisini isisisi isean 1 34 1723 Using th Data Frate ssssroisissns oesi sonaia iania in sa En aea aaea 1 34 1 24 Remote Management Out of Band sssseisssisscvanswcnessssnedinassiussiustbandidasncescasnasunandiueaiaatbensauaenes 1 35 1 25 Local Neighbor Management sssisssssisiissriississssisissrsesiisnsissidisriissdsivesi diavssidinriei dssasisiddssisis 1 36 1 26 Remote Neighbor Management jxcciiespxcteicetnctarpenxcasaubincsinnrncastastnccaudaanensiexeabibacadadawesnts 1 36 1 27 Neighbor Management with other RAD Devices s sss sssessssiseseisssessrstsirerststsrrsensrsrsrrerstnes 1 37 1 28 Network Configurations Using DTE TiMIng esessesesessssessssisssisirrisisssrisenrrrisisrnrerenrrrenenes 1 40 1 29 Typical External DCE Timing Application ssssssessesssseesrssisesssrssreresrsrreestserssrsrreresrerrerrsrne 1 41 1 30 Typical DCE KML 1 4 Timing Application visssasivcasaivaseasanbevedaarsoarsanadaieoaniinvegudanndianseanaounains 1 42 1 31 Typical Internal Timing Mode Application KML 5 KML 6 KML 7 KML 8 and KML F AO KEI EEA E E OENE E EE OEE E OE E AE T EON 1 43 1 32 Typical Internal Timing Mode Application KML 11 Module sssssssnessssesse
63. the DTE2 clock mode when the main link timing is derived from the internal oscillator of Kilomux If you are using a Kilomux equipped with KML 5 KML 6 KML 7 KML 8 KML 10 or KML F modules and you cannot attain the conditions for master timing as described above do not use DTE2 clock mode XMIT Clock Gaer emma RCV Clock Modem External Timing Digital Data Network XMIT Clock RCV Clock Modem Channel Timing Mode DTE 2 KILOMUX Figure 1 40 Clock Mode 3 DTE2 Timing Modes of ISDN Channels ISDN basic rate access channels are available on the KHS U and KVF 4 SO modules These channels provide the interface between the Kilomux system and the ISDN network Timing of Channels with U Interface The transmit timing of a channel with U interface such as a KHS U module is locked to the nodal timing of Kilomux The system nodal timing depends on the selected operating mode of the channel e NT Mode In the NT mode the ISDN U interfaces are usually connected to an ISDN switch whose timing is generally provided by an accurate and stable source One of the U interface ports connected to the network termination NT unit must be selected as an external clock source for Kilomux Thus the Kilomux nodal clock and therefore the transmit timing of the U interface are locked to the timing of the NT unit e LT Mode Kilomux provides the transmit clock for the U interface The re
64. the KML 10 module HARDWARE REVISION The hardware revision of the KML 10 module ALARMS Displays the alarms related to the corresponding main link NONE No alarm has been reported LOCAL SYNC LOSS The local Kilomux lost frame synchronization REMOTE SYNC LOSS The remote Kilomux reports the loss of frame synchronization This message can appear only when downloading is enabled INTERFACE TYPE Displays the interface type of the selected KML 10 module ISDN And for KML 11 the interface is IP ML LOOP Displays the state of the loops on the KML 10 module NONE No loop active R Remote loop active _L Local loop active ML IP If the main link is KML 11 the following will be displayed ETHERNET RATE 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps AUTONEGOTIATION MODE Half duplex or full duplex NO OF TX FRAMES IS X Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description NO OF RX FRAMES IS y ML INTERFACE RJ 45 or Fiber NOLE Using the CLR LAN STAT command can clear TX and RX frames The ISDN specific display fields are as follows e ISDN INTERFACE Displays the interface type S for a KML 10 S module and U for a KML 10 U module e PIGGYBACK INTERFACE TYPE For operation on switched lines displays the ISDN implementation version currently selected for use on the selected module and the release number of the ISDN support package installed on the module For operation on lease
65. the Kilomux 2100 or up to 4 I O modules of various types for the Kilomux 2104 with each module capable of operation in several modes the Kilomux system uses permanent on demand allocation of main link bandwidth This means that bandwidth is permanently allocated to the active channels of each module when the module is inserted into the Kilomux enclosure and the allocation is made in accordance with the selected data rate and the end to end signaling requirements of each channel The main link bandwidth is dynamically reallocated when a change occurs in the number of modules or the number of active module channels or when the operating mode of the main link or the operating mode of the modules is changed For special applications the user can disable the automatic allocation and perform manual allocation Although in general dynamic on demand bandwidth allocation requires that the link is resynchronized after each change in allocation the allocation algorithm used by Kilomux has been optimally designed so that it does not require resynchronization It only requires reallocation of time slots thereby reducing the disruption to other channels when the bandwidth required by a module or a module channel changes In many cases the required changes are made even without time slot reallocation for example disconnecting or reducing the data rate carried by a channel never requires reallocation Bandwidth allocation is performed by organizing the data i
66. the local Kilomux and the data frame A connection to the local Kilomux can be made through e An Ethernet LAN e A SLIP connection In both cases management can be performed via TELNET or RADview Some of the bandwidth of the main link between the two Kilomuxes is used to relay the management information In a V configuration any one of the three Kilomuxes can be considered the local Kilomux The other two Kilomuxes can be managed through the local Kilomux Main Link Remote KILOMUX Remote KILOMUX 2100 Main Link Local KILOMUX ZE TE Supervision Terminal or TELNET or SNMP Figure 1 2 V Configuration The main link between the local Kilomux and the remote Kilomux can also be used to download software Out of Band Management There are several options for managing a remote Kilomux out of band e Using a RADview network management station or TELNET over a LAN connected to the remote Kilomux The remote Kilomux requires an IP address For information on assigning an IP address refer to the DEF AGENT command in the Command Set Description appendix Functional Description 1 5 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual e Using a RADview network management station or TELNET via a SLIP connection to the remote Kilomux The remote Kilomux requires an IP address For information on assigning an IP address refer to the DEF AGENT command in the Command Set De
67. the priorities as necessary A fifth row appears showing the priorities for automatic switch mode calling with the KML 10 card The HIGH priority enables Kilomux to make the I O connection over the ISDN link The I O card must be one of the cards that can trigger the connection and must be set as follows The system mode is SWITCH The main link mode is SWITCH Switch_mode is AUTO 5 When the desired selections are obtained for all the I O slots press ENTER Note If system mode is not SWITCH the SWITCH line show N A for all the I O slots DEF DB FLIP Purpose Define the times of day hour and minutes for switching from one database to the other or cancel this function This command can be used only when an alternate database has already been defined Format DEF DB FLIP Use 1 Type DEF DB FLIP lt ENTER gt F 14 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Note DEF DP 4 Appendix F Command Set Description The first line of the database flip time definition screen is displayed A typical display is shown below E TO DATABASE where HH the desired flipping hour 00 through 23 or NA to disable the switching MM the desired flipping minute 00 through 59 or NA to disable the switching Change parameters as follows Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by pressing the space bar T
68. to end signaling Bandwidth Allocation Example A Kilomux 2100 enclosure equipped as follows is connected to a 256 kbps link BAU used with this link rate is 1 6 kbps The following table lists the required bandwidth allocation Table 1 3 Example of Bandwidth Allocations Modules Installed in Enclosure Allocation Units Five KLS 1 with 4 8 kbps per channel total of 10 channels 30 units seven channels distributed among four modules 4 units signaling require end to end signaling Two KLS 1 with 9 6 kbps per channel total of 4 channels 24 units no end to end signaling Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual One KLS 2 with composite data rate of 19 2 kbps 12 units One KHS 1 with 64 kbps per channel no end to end 40 units signaling One KVC 1 module at 32 kbps per channel 40 units 1 unit signaling Total user allocation 151 units Frame synchronization 1 units Management channel 9 6 kbps 6 units Total capacity used 158 units Reserve capacity 2 units 3 2 kbps Redundancy Kilomux 2100 Only The minimum Kilomux 2100 system configuration requires only one KPS module one KCL module and one KML module For critical applications system availability can be increased by installing redundant modules in the enclosure The redundancy capability is available for two critical functions the main link and the power supply A failure in either one of these functions e g because of link failure or loss of power cou
69. two voice channels For more information refer to the KVC 1 Installation and Operation Manual The following versions are available KVC 1 E amp M four wire or two wire interface with E amp M signaling per RS 464 Types I Il Ill and V and British Telecom SSDC5 KVC 1 FXS two wire interface for direct connection to a telephone set KVC 1 FXO two wire interface for direct connection to a PBX extension line KVC 1 module is not supported in main link rates higher than 384 kbps 1 12 Physical Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information e KVC 1M ADPCM or PCM voice interface module provides one or two voice channels and support error free fax transmission For more information refer to the KVC 1M Installation and Operation Manual The following versions are available a KVC 1M E amp M two voice channel with four wire or two wire interface with E amp M signaling per RS 464 Types I II IH and V and British Telecom SSDC5 KVC 1M E amp M48 similar to the KVC 1M E amp M except that it requires an external 48 VDC source to supply the signaling voltage for increasing the maximum allowed line length KVC 1M FXS two voice channels with two wire interface for direct connection to a telephone set KVC 1M FXSP similar to KVC 1M FXS except that it has an internal ringer and line feed supply KVC 1M FXO two voice channels with two wire interface and FXO loop st
70. 0 15 number of bit 28 8 kbps 72 36 18 9 samples e g when 32 kbps 80 40 20 10 5 the bandwidth 38 4kbps 48 24 12 6 allocation unit is 48 kbps 60 30 15 0 8 kbps and the 56 kbps 70 35 N A channel data rate is 57 6 kbp s 72 36 18 9 300 bps the 64 kbps 80 40 20 10 effective bandwidth 67 2 kbps 84 42 21 used is 8 times 76 8 kbps 96 48 24 12 higher 2 4 kbps 86 4kbps 108 54 27 2 4 kbps translate to 96 0 kbps 120 60 30 15 3 allocation units 105 6 kbps 132 66 33 Therefore the effect 115 2 kbps 144 72 36 18 of oversampling is to 124 8 kbps 156 78 39 increase the 128 kbps 80 40 20 bandwidth used to 160 kbps 100 50 25 transfer low rate 192 kbps 120 60 30 channels 224 kbps 140 70 35 240 kbps 150 75 64 kbps rate 272 kbps 170 85 available only for 304 kbps 190 95 main link rates of 336 kbp s 210 105 128 kbps and higher 368 kbps 230 115 N x 2 4 Nx6 Nx3 E N x 4 8 Nx3 N x 9 6 Nx3 1 allocation unit per module or for each two channels of the For each channel that requires same module when applicable 1 allocation unit can carry end to end signaling including up to four control signals e g two signals for two channels voice channels Application Considerations 1 19 Chapter 1 General Information Note Modules which transmit the signaling information in band e g KVF 1 and KVC 2 do not require bandwidth allocation for channel end
71. 0 VA for AC 40 VA for AC 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C O to 160 F 20 to 70 C Up to 90 non condensing Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information Management LED Indicators Supervision Port Connector Data Rates Word Format Interface Type Connection Type Dial Port Connector Ethernet Port RADview Management System Interface Main link and power supply on line Main link TX and RX Selectable I O channel TX and RX Selectable I O channel control Data RTS and DCD Voice E lead and M lead Local sync Remote sync Alarm indication Test in progress Asynchronous RS 232 or Hayes compatible dial up modem interface 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 kbps For ASCII terminal connection 9 6 kbps only 7 8 bit even odd no parity 1 stop bit format DTE or DCE 9 pin female D type 9 pin female D type UTP or BNC Ethernet connector Provides complete control configuration and monitoring Automatic recognition of all modules and their status Three level security access administration Alarm event recording Technical System Characteristics 1 55 Chapter 1 General Information Diagnostics Main Link Tests I O Channel Tests Alarms ALM RLY connector Dial Port connector 1 56 Technical System Characteristics Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Power up self test Continuous self test during normal operation Link test when configuration downloadin
72. 2104 For example the ML B field in the DSP ST SYS command General F 1 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual BYE Note CLR ALM F 2 Commands F 2 Commands The following are the Kilomux commands Purpose Return control to the Kilomux front panel when TELNET session is terminated Format BYE Use e Type BYE lt ENTER gt If this command is not used you will need to wait 10 minutes to start new TELNET session Purpose Clear the alarm buffer Format CLR ALM LOC A Use 1 To clear only the event alarms on the local Kilomux type CLR ALM LOC lt ENTER gt or CLR ALM lt ENTER gt To clear all the alarms on the local Kilomux type CLR ALM A lt ENTER gt or CLR ALM LOC A lt ENTER gt 2 After the desired parameter values are selected press ENTER to end Kilomux will display the time and date followed by the Kilomux prompt Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description CLR LAN STATISTICS CLR LOOP Note Purpose Clear the Rx and Tx frame counters Format CLR LAN STATISTICS or CLR LAN STAT ML A ML B ML A ML B Use 1 To clear the Rx and Tx frame counters when the main link mode is SINGLE type CLR LAN STATIST CLR LAN STAT lt ENTER gt
73. 3 2 E 1 LOG OFF E 9 Loopback Timing 1 43 M Main Link Configuration Parameters B CH E 6 BUFFER_SIZE E 4 CODE E 5 CRC 4 E 5 DSR amp CTS E 4 FRAME E 5 FUNCTION E 5 TS CODE E 5 INTERFACE E 4 ISDN STANDARD E 6 MASK E 6 MODE E 6 SPEED E 4 SYNC E 5 TIMING E 4 Main Link Interface Characteristics 1 49 Main Link Loops Local Main Link Modem Loop Loop 3 5 7 Remote Main Link Loop 5 6 Remote Main Link Modem Loop Loop 2 5 7 Main Link Modules 1 10 Main Link Parameters Specific Configuration Instructions 3 4 BUFFER_SIZE 3 4 DSR amp CTS 3 4 SPEED 3 4 TIMING 3 4 Main Link Timing 1 46 Main System Features 1 1 Management Domains Under SNMP C 3 Equipment Management Methods 1 33 In Band 1 5 1 34 Local KILOMUX 2100 1 4 Local Management 1 33 Out of Band 1 5 1 35 Remote KILOMUX 2100 1 4 Remote Management 1 33 System 1 33 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Management Communication Port 1 38 Dial Port Connector 1 38 Ethernet Port 1 38 Supervisory Port Connector 1 38 Management Using Supervision Terminal Hardware Requirements 2 8 MASK E 6 Messages Alarm 5 1 ML 5 1 ML_MODE 3 3 E 2 MODE E 6 Modules Control Logic 1 10 I O 1 12 Main Link 1 10 Option 1 12 Power Supply 1 11 Multidrop Configurations 1 26 Multiplexing 1 16 N Normal Indications 4 13 0 Operating Instructions Front Panel Controls and Indicators 4 7 Malfunction 4 13
74. 4 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table E 2 Main Link Parameters Designation Function Values SPEED Determines the main link rate Data rate in kbps Th ed di atecd d 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 32 48 56 64 128 e supported cala rates epena ON 192 256 384 512 768 1024 1536 the main link module type refer to the corresponding module Installation and Operation Manual Default 64 TIMING Determines the system timing mode KML 1 KML 2 KML 3 and KML 4 For the modules KML 1 through E ning KML 4 al eaat in link DCE DCE timing A AOSE CORAS MANAN E DCE External DCE timing interface type Default DTE KML 5 and KML 6 INT Internal timing LBT loopback timing KML 7 KML 8 and KML F INT Internal timing LBT loopback timing DCE DCE timing KML 11 INT Internal timing DCE DCE timing Adaptive timing BUFFER_SIZE Determines the size of the main link 8 8 bits receive buffer used in the DTE and f 256 256 bits recommended for use on E DCE modes supported by modules tellite link KML 1 through KML 6 only SALE RESIS This parameter is not displayed when the main link interface is DCE Default 8 INTERFACE Displays the physical interface V 35 V 35 interface selected by means of an adapter cable for the KML 3 module eel oe Nintenda DSR amp CTS Determines the handling of the DSR EXT When DSR and or CTS signals are and CTS signals for the modules OFF the transmit data line is held at KML 1 K
75. 4 1 4 2 4 3 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents Kilomux 2104 Enclosure Typical Rear VIEW sscissiensionanedowanaanienna mavdaanaunsioaanedanaauenssaamarstounien 2 19 Kil m x 2100 Front Parte iasleias Seseecaeaaueadeasnoleicsicnounsioneaaacaunanendanie vines a a a a EA 4 7 Kilomu x 2104 Front Panelen a ea eauaueNaS 4 7 Indicator FURCHONS oesie E AE E E E EE 4 8 Local Main Link Loop Signal Path ss essesssessessssresesrerrerssrsrrsssrreresrsrrsrssrssrrrresrstrerssrerrerenrte 5 5 Remote Main Link Loop Signal Pats viaicvcesisasswissansiewledasenndsereedas vediaibrasasnssevencanmadscasiaastaudiats 5 6 Main Link Modem Loop 3 Signal Paths iccasiecscntnyscss toonstuceancentonniteaenadubumonaanameunm asin 5 7 Main Link Modem Loop 2 Signal Path xs sssicusaivesversgcuiawessntesedecsosnns chia neeattvusnendoewanaedeniuswaes 5 8 I O Module Local Loop on Individual Channel ssn isissahesavssinaedo disntsnstunasssidvanesadanidenstammanadeviontas 5 9 I O Module Remote Loop on Individual Channel ss sssesssssessessssesssrsrrsrssrsseresssrsrrerssrerreresrne 5 9 Voice I O Module Test Tone Injection Path as csicsssacdusoaaen anaes dienssuacssicaeharwenddeccnapaueieeeannncdariuns 5 11 Table of Contents List of Tables T1 Kilomux Multiplexing Data sessssisesssssiessi ssnin sisine es aoa 1 17 1 2 Bandwidth Allo Canons osixsxsdicetsasdthandasiedvcna So beduesteuborn
76. ALL_OUT_MODE Controls the use of the call out function NO Call out function is disabled YES Kilomux will initiate a call after each new alarm LOG OFF Control the idle disconnect time NO Automatic session disconnect disabled 10_min Automatic disconnection after 10 minutes if no input data is received by the dial out port AUXILIARY DEVICE Selects the management mode supported by the dial out port Note At any time only one of the two ports of the KCL 2 module can be used for management access NMS SLIP The dial out port connects to an SNMP management station and or TELNET host using the SLIP protocol AGENT SLIP The dial out port is connected to another agent port using the SLIP protocol NMS PPP Same as NMS SLIP except the PPP protocol is used AGENT PPP Same as AGENT SLIP except the PPP protocol is used ROUTING PROTOCOL DEF FRAME Controls the transmission of routing tables which allows management traffic to be routed through the dial out port NONE Routing not supported PROPRIET Routing of management traffic by means of the RAD proprietary protocol Define manually the allocation of bits in the main link frame This activity is necessary when a KDI module is used to bypass data between the Kilomux main links Manual allocation is enabled by means of the DEF SYS command The DEF FRAME command must be repeated after each change in the main link dat
77. AN 2 1 0 72 KVC 1M FXSP CAN 2 95 0 84 KVC 1M FXO CAN 1 55 0 3 KVC 1M E amp M CAN 2 25 0 36 KVC 3 FXO 2 5 0 3 KVC 3 E amp M 2 5 a 0 24 KVC 3 FXS 3 1 2 KVC 3 FXSP 5 1 308 KVC 3M SO 3 1 0 25 KVF 3 E amp M 2 2 0 12 0 6 KVF 3 FXS 3 1 0 06 0 84 KVF 3 FXSP 3 25 0 12 0 96 KVF 3 FXO 23 0 12 0 54 KVF 4 FXS 4 0 72 KVF 4 FXSP 7 5 1 8 KVF 4 E amp M 4 1 A 0 72 2 4 Site Requirements and Prerequisites I O Module KVF 4 FXO KVF 4 FXSW KVF 4 SO KVF 5 MASTER KVF 5 SLAVE KVF 6 E1 16 KVF 6 E1 31 KVF 6 T1 12 KVF 6 T1 24 KVF 8 E amp M KVF 8 FXO KVF 8 FXS KTRE KMBE KMBE N KCL 1 KCL 1 N KCL 2 KAI KDI KML 1 V 35 KML 2 V 24 KML 3 V 36 KML 4 X 21 KML 5 G 703 KML 1 2 3 4 N KML 5 N G 703 KML 6 N KML 7 N KML 8 N KML 10 N KML 11 KML 11 F KML F ST13 KML F ST85 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 5 VDC Power Consumption Watts 4 4 75 4 5 TLD 6 75 4 9 6 9 4 5 6 5 6 6 72 4 25 2 45 2 45 0 375 0 5 1 95 0 325 1 1 1 125 1 125 1 125 1 125 1 6 2 05 2 5 3 5 3 5 3 4 3 35 12 VDC Power Consumption Watts 048 048 1 7 0 24 0 96 0 96 0 06 0 156 0 02 0 012 0 42 0 42 0 42 0 42 0 4104 0 42 0 42 0 42 0 42 Chapter 2 Installation 12 VDC Power Consumption Watts 0 6 0 48 0 24 0 6 0 6 0 44 0 44 0 44 0 24 0 036 0 042 0 042 0 012 0 012 0 012 0 012 0 0576 Site Requirements and Prerequisites
78. AS epenn a e e A E E E E 5 1 ABIETO E E aol Kilomux TEST OPTIONS Generalsit asninn SENE RE T R 5 1 Test Options Operating INStrUctiONS s sisiseweisciviedecdvnecsstbosteesssontadseBousesstessessstue sees ssuuees F3 Kilomux Diagnostic Functions General sssssssessessisesststseissrsirtnstnrsstntiennsinterisrrsrnrernsenete 5 3 Malin Link LOOPS senen EE saan 5 4 VO Mod le Logpsand TeSt ssassn i niei aaa a E EEE E ENET ENN 5 8 Appendix A Connection Data Appendix B Alarms Appendix C SNMP Management Appendix D Software Download Appendix E Configuration Parameters Appendix F Command Set Description Appendix G Kilomux Application Guide Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual iii Table of Contents List of Figures T1 Kil mux 2100 System Applications escisiones aii a av 1 2 1 2 V Configuratii s sisersisisioseisorstvenssiovesoraneese rosero eared eE ENEE EEE ESETE EE Eas 1 5 1 3 Kilomux 2100 Enclosure with Modules General VieW cc cccccccecccecsesssssseeececeeeeesessstsseeeeees 1 7 1 4 Kilomux 2100 Enclosure Rear VieW ccccccccccccsessssecececececeesesseeececececeesnesssseaeeeeseseeessssaeaeeess 1 8 1 5 Kilomux 2100 Enclosure Front PANEL ws iinasing sss ainsi denihonimmnnas nace iianamseie 1 8 1 6 Kilomux 2104 Enclosure General VieW ccccesessscececececsesessecececececeeeeesssseaeeeeeeeeeensssasaeeess 1 9 1 7 Kilomux 2104 Enclosure Rear VieW ccccccccccccesssssecececececs
79. B B gt A SWITCH O tu N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DDPPPPPPPPPPPPD SESS EEE EEE EEE Checking Frame Structure Updating Frame Structure 2 Use the space bar to move the cursor to the desired slot number and press the F or B key to change the main link used by this I O slot Commands F 13 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual If priority bumping is used the third row shows the priority assigned to each module when a flip occurs from main link A to main link B If priority bumping and switched backup are disabled this row shows N A for all the I O slots 3 Use the space bar and the F and B keys to change the priorities as necessary A fourth row appears showing the priorities for flips from main link B to main link A If the two main links operate at the same data rate or the switched backup mode is used Kilomux 2100 automatically sets the same priorities for flips in either direction Then this line shows N A for all the I O slots Ifthe data rates of the two main links are different and the priority bumping mode is used you can select the priorities for each I O slot using the same procedure as above 4 Use the space bar and the F and B keys to change
80. CCS information in the KVF 6 module only if SIG MODE is CSS IF SIG_MODE is CAS the N A will be displayed in this field e A B C D Displays the information that will be sent through this bit to the PBX The options are A B C D NOT_A NOT_B NOT_C NOT_D 0 or 1 e EXIST Indicates whether the module exists in the Kilomux or not DSP SIGNALING or DSP SIG Purpose Display the signaling bits state in KVF 5 or KVF 6 modules Format DSP SIGNALING i or DSP SIG i Use Displays the 4 CAS bits A B C D of signaling for KVF 5 and KVF 6 modules for connected time slots For each card that carries CAS information signaling mode is CAS all the connected timeslots will be displayed accompanied by their 4 CAS bits current information DSP PRBS_INJ Purpose Display the result of the PRBS test running on the specified I O module channel Commands F 39 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Format DSP PRBS INT i j C Use Same as for the DSP BERT command except the use of PRBS_INJ instead of BERT Note that if the PRBS test is activated without closing a loop along the signal path errors will always be reported DSP REM AGENT Purpose Display the other Kilomux connected to the local Kilomux Format DSP REM AGENT Use e Type DSP REM AGENT lt ENTER gt Kilomux displays the following
81. CS lt ENTER gt or 2 To clear the counter of ML A or ML B in dual link configuration type CLR LAN STATISTICS A lt ENTER gt or CLR LAN STAT A lt ENTER gt CLR LAN STATISTICS B lt ENTER gt or CLR LAN STAT B lt ENTER gt Purpose Deactivate the specified user initiated test or loop Refer to the Diagnostics chapter for a description of the available tests Format CLR LOOP looptype ML A ML B i j or CLR LP looptype ML A ML B i 3 Use 1 To deactivate a specific type of loop on main link A type CLR LOOP L ML A lt ENTER gt or CLR LP L ML A lt ENTER gt CLR LOOP R ML A lt ENTER gt or CLR LP R ML A lt ENTER gt CLR LOOP V54 2 ML A lt ENTER gt or CLR LP V54 2 ML A lt ENTER gt LR LOOP V54 3 ML A lt ENTER gt or CLR LP V54 3 ML A lt ENTER gt LR LOOP L ML lt ENTER gt or CLR LP L ML lt ENTER gt LR LOOP R ML lt ENTER gt or CLR LP R ML lt ENTER gt LR LOOP V54 2 ML lt ENTER gt or CLR LP V 54 2 ML lt ENTER gt LR LOOP V54 3 ML lt ENTER gt or CLR LP V 54 3 ML lt ENTER gt For main link A it is not necessary to specify the link e g you can type CLR LOOP L ML lt ENTER gt instead of
82. Configuration Parameters Table E 3 lists the available supervisory port configuration parameters that can be configured from the front panel and their functions The table also lists the parameter values included in the Kilomux default configuration Table E 3 Supervisory Port Parameters Designation Function Values SPEED Selects supervisory port data rate Supervisory port data rate in kbps 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 AUTO Autobaud operation The Kilomux automatically identifies the data rate applied to its supervisory port To enable positive identification the transmission must start with three consecutive Carriage Returns Do not select AUTO when connecting to a RADview station Default 9600 DATA Selects the number of data bits inthe 7 or 8 data bits word format Default 8 PARITY Controls the use of parity ODD Odd parity EVEN Even parity NONE Parity disabled only with 8 data bits Default NONE INTERFACE Selects supervisory port interface DCE The Kilomux appears as a DCE for the supervision terminal DTE The Kilomux operates as a DTE for connection via modem to the supervision terminal A cross over cable must be used Appendix A Default DCE CTS Selects if the CTS line is always active RTS or if it follows the RTS line ON Default ON DCD_DEL Indicates time delay between In msec DCD ON and the sending of data 0 10 50 100 200 300 Default 0 msec DSR Selects if t
83. Dangerous voltages are present inside the KPS module when it is connected to power Do not connect the KPS module to power before it is properly installed within the Kilomux enclosure and disconnect the input power from the module before removing it from the enclosure The installation and preparation of the module shall be done by a qualified person who is aware of the hazards involved Rear Panels The rear panels of the various types of KPS modules are shown in Figure 2 4 The following table also lists the functions of the components located on these panels Table 2 5 KPS Modules Rear Panels Description Turns the power on off Lights when the input voltage is connected Indicates the nominal mains operating voltage of the module and the fuse rating Connector for the module input power voltage KPS 3 and KPS 7 48 VDC KPS 4 KPS 6 KPS 8 100 to 240 VAC KPS 5 24 VDC 2 16 Interfaces and Connections Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation Grounding oe Grounding PE Terminal me Grounding pana Terminal wito F Terminal wite Label Supply 100240vAC Voltage m es Power l Fuse Power Connecter Power Connector Connector Module KPS 3 Module KPS 4 Module KPS 5 Grounding ON OFF Grounding ON OFF Terminal Switch Grounding ON OFF Terminal Switch Termi
84. Dial up Modem 2 11 Request to Send RTS 2 9 Ring Indication RI 2 10 Hardware Requirements 2 8 Connection Methods 2 9 Supervisory Port Interface Characteristics 2 8 Terminal Characteristics 2 8 Sj TS CODE E 5 I O Module Applications 1 52 I O Module Loops and Tests 5 8 I O Modules 1 12 In Band Management 1 5 Index of Commands 4 4 Initial Setup and Configuration 2 21 Installation Grounding 2 2 KCL 2 Module 2 15 2 17 KILOMUX 2100 Enclosure 2 12 KILOMUX 2104 Enclosure 2 13 KPS Module 2 13 Site Requirements 2 2 INTERFACE E 4 E 8 Internal Timing 1 43 1 44 1 45 IP Address Structure C 5 IP Environment C 4 C 5 Automatic IP Traffic Routing C 6 IP Address Structure C 5 ISDN STANDARD E 6 ZK KAI 1 12 KCL Module 2 14 KCL 2 Module Installation 2 15 2 17 KCL 2 1 10 KDI General 1 12 KHS 1 13 KHS 703 1 14 KILOMUX 2100 Physical Description 1 6 KILOMUX 2100 Enclosure Installation 2 12 KILOMUX 2104 Physical Description 1 8 KILOMUX 2104 Enclosure Installation 2 13 KLS 1 13 KMBE 1 15 KML General 1 10 Module Redundancy 1 21 KPS Module 2 13 KTRE 1 15 KVC 1 12 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual LED 5 1 Local KILOMUX 2100 Management 1 4 Main Link Modem Loop Loop 3 5 7 Local Channel Loop 5 9 Local Configuration Set up Procedure Channel Parameters 3 5 General Configuration Procedure 3 2 Main Link Parameters 3 4 SP Parameters 3 5 System Parameters
85. EF SYS command Format DISCONNECT SWITCH A B Use 1 Type DISCONNECT SWITCH A lt ENTER gt or DISCONNECT SWITCH B lt ENTER gt Use of this command is dependant on the configuration of the local Kilomux The main link A or B must be attached to a KML 10 card whose parameters set by the command DEF ML are main_link_mode SWITCH switch_mode MANUAL and the main link is master in_num_mode NONE set by the command DEF ML CALL Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description DSP AGENT Purpose Display the IP and SNMP agent parameters Format DSP AGENT Use e Type DSP AGENT The following is displayed KM RAD AGENT PARAMETE DDRESS IS 2192 115 71 44 ET MASK IS 255 255 255 192 ULT GATEWAY IS 2192 115 071 033 COMMUNITY IS public E COMMUNITY IS private P COMMUNITY IS public ADDRESS IS 00 20 D2 FD 1C 17 E Thu 1998 07 30 TIME 14 52 49 Note Refer to the command DEF AGENT for an explanation of the information displayed by this command DSP ALM Purpose Display the contents of the alarm buffer This buffer can contain up to 100 alarms Format DSP ALM C CA Use e To display all the local Kilomux alarms type DSP ALM lt ENTER gt e To display all the local Kilomux alarms and then clear the event alarms type DSP ALM C lt
86. ENTER gt or LP BERT i j lt ENTER gt data channel only LOOP TONE INJ i j lt ENTER gt or LP TONE INJ i j lt ENTER gt voice channel only ML RECOVERY Purpose MONITOR When Kilomux is configured for operation with manually controlled switched backup or priority bumping refer to DEF SYS command this command is used to initiate recovery from a priority bumping or switching to the backup link event and return to normal operation Format ML R ECOV ERY lt ENT ER gt Use ML R ECOV ERY lt ENT an To initiate return to normal operation type R gt Purpose Select the desired I O module channel for monitoring Format MON ITOR i j or M j j Commands Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Use e To select a module channel type MONITOR i j lt ENTER gt or M i j lt ENTER gt where i is the number of the I O slot number 1 through 12 REBUILD FRAME Purpose Rebuild the Kilomux frame The Kilomux frame is updated according to the activated channels in the order they were inserted When an I O card is taken in out the frame is updated REBUILD FRAME should be used after a change in the Kilomux channels Format REBUILD FRAME A B Use e To rebuild the Kilomux frame type REBU
87. ER Enter the TEI number 0 63 This parameter is only relevant for Static TEI Management KML 10 only supports basic data 64K unrestricted service BACKUP SUB ADDRESS and BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER Up to two numbers that can be used for backup in master configuration or for Calling Line Identification CLI in slave configuration Type the numbers in the appropriate field and press ENTER To erase a number type a minus sign before the first digit and press ENTER For master configuration 64K call Use only the FIRST BACKUP SUB ADDRESS and BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER as the called number For master configuration 128K call If both 64K calls are for the same number as in the ETSI standard use only the FIRST BACKUP SUB ADDRESS and FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER For the US standard if the called number is composed of two abstract terminals enter the first called number in the FIRST BACKUP SUB ADDRESS Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description and FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER and the second in the SECOND BACKUP SUB ADDRESS and SECOND BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER For slave configuration 64K call Use only the FIRST BACKUP SUB ADDRESS and FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER as the calling number i e the
88. ILD FRAME A lt ENTER gt or REBUILD FRAME B lt ENTER gt for ML A channels or ML B channels The following message appears Updating Frame DATE XXX yyyy dd mm TIME RESET LOC Purpose Reset the local Kilomux Format RESET LOC Use e To reset the local Kilomux type RESET LOC lt ENTER gt RESET IO Purpose Reset I O module F 56 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description Format RESET IO i Use e To reset the I O module installed in the Kilomux type RESET IO i lt ENTER gt where i is the I O slot number 1 through 12 RESET ML Purpose Reset ML module Format RESET ML A or B Use e To reset ML module type RESET ML A or B lt ENTER gt where A is referenced to ML_A slot and B to ML_B slot TIME Purpose Set the time for the Kilomux internal real time clock Format Use 1 To set the time type TIME lt ENTER gt Kilomux sends the time entry form 2 Bring the cursor to the first field to be changed by pressing ENTER 3 Change the selected field by pressing F to increase and B to decrease the displayed values When done press ENTER to move to the next field 4 Set the time about one minute beyond the current time and then press ENTER at the cor
89. ILOMUX 2100 LELEN Figure 1 11 Dual Link High Capacity Point to Point Application 1 22 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information Location B Pa KILOMUX Location A ae User Connected to Location B User Connected to Location C KILOMUX 2100 Pi 7 Location A KILOMUX Figure 1 12 Dual Link System Independent Link Application Bypassing Configurations Dual link configurations also enable direct transfer of channel between the two links this is called bypassing This function requires the presence of a KDI module in Kilomux 2100 Figure 1 13 shows the operation of the basic bypassing configuration In Figure 1 13 some of the users at location A are connected to users at location B and other users at location A are connected using the bypassing function of the KDI module to users at location C the connection is full duplex As explained above with respect to bypassing the multidrop channel is handled either as a bypassed channel or as a dropped channel depending on the state of the RTS line The KDI module supports the bypassing of one contiguous block of bits from one link to the other The bypassed block is specified by three parameters e The position of the first bit the starting bit of the block to be bypassed in the multiplexed frame of main link A e The number of bits to be bypassed the block size e The position of the first bit the st
90. Installation and Operation Manual Table B 1 Alarm Messages Cont Code Message Terminal Alarm Description Type 8 9 DB 1 CHKSUM ERROR Event The checksum of one of the data bases stored by DB 2 CHKSUM ERROR the KCL module does not match the checksum calculated after power up The default data base must be loaded 10 BANDWIDTH State The total bandwidth required for the active OVERFLOW channels exceeds the main link data rate Change channel configuration as required or increase the main link data rate 11 ALARM BUFFER State The number of alarms stored in the Kilomux alarm OVERFLOW buffer exceeds the maximum allowable number 100 New alarms are now written over previous alarms 12 CLOCK WAS State The fallback timing reference source has been CHANGED TO selected for use FALLBACK 13 CLOCK WAS State The internal oscillator is now used as a timing CHANGED TO reference source as a result of the simultaneous INTERNAL failure of both the master and fallback clock sources 14 CL HARDWARE State A technical failure has been detected in the KCL FAILURE module circuits Replace the module 15 REMOTE SYNC LOSS State The KML module installed in the specified slot ML SLOT i A ML B of the remote Kilomux unit lost synchronization This message is displayed only when downloading is enabled 16 DOWNLOAD ERROR State Errors are detected in the data received through the management channel 17 I O SYNC LOSS State The KLS 2 module installed in the spe
91. KILOMUX 2100 I O Modules The algorithm works by automatically aligning i e synchronizing and equalizing the transmission delays the two B channels a process which uses FIFO buffers that can store data for intervals of the same order as the maximum differential delay to be corrected The alignment process is performed when communication is first established between the two Kilomux 2100 units and is repeated each time a loss of main link synchronization occurs or one of the Kilomux 2100 units is reset FIFO s are also reset when one of these events occurs Typically the channel alignment process requires up to 20 seconds The KML 10 module can use various structured leased line services S0 such as the FVO Type 4 service available in Germany and can be configured by the user for optimal support of the following specific ISDN implementations e ETSI Euro ISDN NET3 e AT amp T 4ESS and 5ESS ISDN switches custom multipoint and point to point services e Northern Telecom DMS 100 ISDN switch e Bellcore ISDN switch NI1 e NTT Japanese ISDN version 1 30 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information Switch Mode Kilomux provides a dial up mode of operation that enables users to allocate ISDN basic access lines via the KML 10 module card The ISDN line is allocated to Main Link A or for Kilomux 2100 only Main Link B depending upon the configuration Kilom
92. Kilomux displays the following ALARM NUMBER 1 to 102 2 Enter the number of alarm codes you want to change and press ENTER Kilomux displays the following ALARM DEBOUNC EB 0 to 255 3 Enter the debounce number The debounce number can be one of the following Commands F 9 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 0 Default of debounce e g after initiate database 255 Mask the alarm and do not report to the user 1 to 254 Debounce in seconds 4 Press ENTER The alarm string with debounce number will display DEF CALL Purpose Define the call out parameters for the Kilomux dial out port connector CONTROL DTE The call out function is enabled by means of the DEF DP port The specified call out parameters are used by Kilomux to build the call command that is sent to the dial out modem The modem connected to the CONTROL DTE connector must be set up as follows for convenience the Hayes commands required to select the specified parameters are listed in brackets e Auto answer mode AT S0O 1 e Call set up in response to the CONNECT string AT X0 e Noecho AT EO e Verbose mode no codes e g CONNECT string instead of 0 AT V1 Format DEF CALL Use 1 To define the Kilomux call out parameters type DEF CALL lt ENTER gt You will see the first page of the call out parameters data form A t
93. L_SIZE When end to end transmission of control signals is used shows the total number of bits assigned to carry the control signals of the module installed in the corresponding slot e LAST_BIT The number of the last bit in the block of bits assigned to the module installed in the corresponding slot Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description DSP ST ML Purpose Display the status of the desired KML module Format DSP ST ML A B Use To display the status of the KML module installed in slot 3 type DSP ST ML lt ENTER gt or DSP ST ML A lt ENTER gt To display the status of the KML module installed in slot 4 type DSP ST ML B lt ENTER gt General Display Format A typical DSP ST display is shown below EVISION EVISION E TYPR The display fields are as follows ACTIVE ML Displays the currently active KML module ML A for the KML module installed in slot 3 ML B for the module installed in slot 4 or BOTH for a Kilomux operating in the dual link priority bumping or switched backup mode SOFTWARE REVISION The software revision of the KML module HARDWARE REVISION The hardware revision of the KML module ALARMS Displays the alarms related to the corresponding main link NONE No alarm has been reported LOCAL SYNC LOSS The local Kilomux lost frame synchron
94. ML 11 or KML F module in the DCE timing mode at the local Kilomux with the timing taken from one of its KHS 1 channels In conjunction the remote Kilomux operates in the loopback timing adaptive timing for the KML 11 mode DCE Timing Loopback Timing DTE 8 DDS x 3 Network 5 g RCV o Clock KILOMUX KILOMUX Channel in DTE2 Timing Figure 1 34 Typical DCE from I O Timing Mode Application KML 7 KML 8 KML F 1 44 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information DTE i Note DCE Timing Adaptive Timing 38 DDS Network Ethernet g 2 Network RCV O Clock KILOMUX KILOMUX Master Clock Channel in DTE2 Timing Figure 1 35 Typical DCE from I O Timing Mode Application KML 11 DCE Timing from Main Link In dual link configurations the DCE timing mode can be used by the KML 7 KML 8 or KML F main link module in order to use the other installed main link as the timing source The source main link can be of any type for example KML 1 and be operating in any of the timing modes relevant for the type as were previously described Figure 1 36 shows a basic dual link configuration that uses a KML 7 KML 8 or KML F module KML A in the DCE timing mode with the timing taken from the other main link KML B In conjunction the remote Kilomux connected to KML A operates in the loopback timing mode to ensure sy
95. ML 2 and KML 3 MARK When these signals are INT The states of the external DSR logically OFF the transmit data line and or CTS signals are disregarded and would be held to MARK both signals are assumed to be continuously ON the transmit data is then not held to MARK when the state of either external line is OFF Default INT General Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix E Configuration Parameters Table E 2 Main Link Parameters Cont Designation Function Values TS CODE Selects the code transmitted to fill The available selections are 00 to FF hexa idle empty time slots in the frames transmitted on the T1 or E1 line by Default 00 for the KML 7 the KML 7 and KML 8 modules 3F for the KML 8 FRAME Selects the multiframing mode for the KML 7 module KML 7 and KML 8 modules DA SF 12 frames per multiframe ESF 24 frames per multiframe Default SF KML 8 module G732N 2 frames per multiframe G732S 16 frames per multiframe Default G732N SYNC Selects the frame synchronization CCITT Complies with ITU T Rec G 732 algorithm used by the KML 7 and on the KML 8 module only KMI 8 modi es and thus eects the 6941 1 Astequifed by ATST TREAT time required to return to normal after 10 seconds operation after local loss of synchronization FAST After 1 second Default FAST CRC 4 Enables the generation of check bits NO CRC 4 option disabled in accordance with the CRC 4 polynomial specifie
96. N active during a management session Equipment Needed 2 9 Chapter 2 Installation Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual When the RTS line is OFF inactive Kilomux interprets any data received from the terminal on the TD line as MARK Clear to Send CTS The state of the CTS line is determined by the CTS parameter e ON The CTS line is always ON active e RTS The CTS line follows the RTS line Data Carrier Detect DCD The state of the DCD line depends on the communication address node number e When the node address is 0 the DCD line is always ON active e When a non zero node address is used multidrop operation the DCD line is switched ON active when data is detected on the RD line provided Kilomux recognizes its own address in the data stream To simulate DTE operation the delay between these events can be set by the user by means of the DCD_DEL parameter Ring Indication RI The RI line is used only with dial up modems DTE interface mode The RI line is normally OFF inactive when the modem attached to the Kilomux SP connector detects an incoming call the RI line is switched ON active See also the DSR line Data Set Ready DSR e Usually the DSR line is configured to track the DTR line In this case if the supervisory port interface is DTE the DSR line will be switched ON for 5 seconds when the RI line is ON while the DTR line is OFF e If the supervisory port interface is
97. NMP TRAPS C 8 SNMP Principles C 1 SNMP TRAPS C 8 Software Download Cold Local Installation D 1 General D 1 Warm Installation Upgrading D 3 SP Parameters Specific Configuration Instructions Data 3 5 Management 3 5 Parity 3 5 Speed 3 5 Speed 3 5 E 8 SPEED 3 4 E 4 Starting a Session Multiple KILOMUX 2100 4 11 Single KILOMUX 2100 4 10 Sub Link Timing 1 49 Supervision and Configuration 1 4 Supervision Language 4 1 Command Language Syntax 4 1 Command Options 4 2 Command Protocol 4 3 Commands F 2 Index of Commands 4 4 Supervision Terminal Operating Instructions Control Session 4 11 Ending a Control Session 4 12 Power Up with Supervision Terminal Connected 4 9 Starting a Session Multiple KILOMUX 2100 4 11 Starting a Session Single KILOMUX 2100 4 10 Supervisory Port Configuration Parameters AUXILIARY_DEVICE E 9 CTS E 8 DATA E 8 DCD_DEL E 8 DSR E 8 INTERFACE E 8 LOG_OFF E 9 PARITY E 8 POP_ALARM E 9 PWD E 9 SPEED E 8 Supervisory Port Connector 1 38 Supervisory Port Interface Characteristics 2 8 Switch Mode 1 31 Switched Backup Operation 1 28 Using Dial up Modems 1 28 Using ISDN Lines 1 29 SYNC E 5 System Configuration Parameters DWLD BW B E 2 System Configuration Parameters CLK_FBACK E 2 CLK_MASTER E 1 DWLD BW A E 2 ML_MODE E 2 System Installation Grounding 2 2 Site Requirements 2 2 System Management 1 33 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual n
98. Normal Indications 4 13 Turn Off 4 14 Option Modules 1 12 Out of Band Management 1 5 p Parity 3 5 PARITY E 8 Physical Description Control Logic Modules 1 10 I O Modules 1 12 KAI 1 12 KCL 2 1 10 KDI 1 12 KHS 1 13 KILOMUX 2100 1 6 KILOMUX 2100 Front Panel 1 8 KILOMUX 2100 Rear Panel 1 7 KILOMUX 2104 1 8 KILOMUX 2104 Front Panel 1 10 KILOMUX 2104 Rear Panel 1 9 KLS 1 13 KMBE 1 15 KML 1 10 KPS 1 11 KTRE 1 15 KVC 1 12 Main Link Modules 1 10 Option Modules 1 12 Power Supply Modules 1 11 POP_ALARM E 9 Power Supply Considerations 2 7 Modules 1 11 Power Supply Modules Current and Power Capabilities 2 6 Current and Power Requirements 2 3 Power Up with Supervision Terminal Connected 4 9 PRBS Transmission 5 10 Priority Bumping 1 27 PWD E 9 P Ratings of Ring and Feed Voltage Supplies 2 7 Rear Panel KILOMUX 2100 1 7 KILOMUX 2104 1 9 Redundancy 1 20 KML Module 1 21 KPS Module 1 21 Remote Channel Loop 5 9 In Band Management 1 5 KILOMUX 2100 Management 1 4 Main Link Loop 5 6 Main Link Modem Loop Loop 2 5 7 Out of Band Management 1 5 Request to Send 2 9 Requirements Power Supply Modules 2 3 RI 2 10 Ring Indication 2 10 RTS 2 9 S Setting Internal Jumpers KCL Module 2 14 KPS Module 2 13 Site Requirements 2 2 SNMP Environment C 1 Management Domains Under SNMP C 3 SNMP Management IP Environment C 4 SNMP Environment C 1 SNMP Principles C 1 S
99. ODE DEF NP DEF PWD DEF ROUTE DEF SP DEF SYS DISCONNECT SWITCH DSP AGENT DSP ALM DSP BERT DSP CH CON DSP HDR TST Table 4 2 Kilomux Command Set Index Cont Purpose Deactivate I O module channel monitor Connect ISDN line between a local and remote Kilomux Set the date for the Kilomux internal clock Define a daily schedule for operation in the switched backup mode Define the IP parameters to the local Kilomux Define the debounce time in seconds for each alarm code or mask the alarm Define the dial out parameters for the dial out port Configure the parameters of a selected module channel voice or data Define the main link and priorities of each module Define the times of day for the switching flipping between the two databases Define the parameters of the dial out port Define manually the allocation of main link bits Define or modify the network management stations to which the SNMP agent sends traps Define parameters for the main link Define the switched backup connection setup parameters for use in the switched backup mode Define the logical name of Kilomux Define the node number of Kilomux Define the configuration parameters of the network port Define new password and or display the current password Enables static routing via the ETHERNET management port Configure supervisory port parameters Configure system parameters Disconnect the ISDN line between the local and remote Kilomux Displ
100. ORY NUMBI SECOND BACKUP SUB ADDRESS FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBI Norg TEI NUMBER only exists if the TEI MANAGER parameter is set to Static TEI in the DEF ML B command A typical form of other standards not US ISDN standard is shown below IN NUM MOD CALL TIMI SW_BACKUP_DB NONI ONLINE OCAL SUB ADDR OCAL DIR BACKUP SUB ADDR BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMB 2 Select the parameter values as follows e IN_NUM_MODE Controls the handling of incoming calls For the Kilomux unit configured as master always select NONE to cause the KML 10 module to reject all incoming calls the master unit need only initiate calls For the Kilomux unit configured as slave you can select ALL to cause the KML 10 module to accept incoming calls from all the source addresses or LOCAL to cause the KML 10 module to accept calls only from the address specified in the BACKUP_CALL_NUMBER field e CALL TIME OUT Specifies the maximum time Kilomux will wait for the connection of the switched backup link Commands F 21 Appendix F Command Set Description Note F 22 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual If this time expires Kilomux aborts the connection attempt and generates alarm message 22 The available selections are 30 45 60 and 120 seconds SW_BACKUP_DB Selects the database that will be used to determine the configuration of t
101. RJ LC Fiber optic 850 mm ST SMA or FC PC connector Fiber optic 1300 mm 1550 mm ST or FC PC connector Technical System Characteristics 1 53 Chapter 1 General Information Equipment Enclosure Environment Control Signals RS 232 amp V 35 V 36 X 21 Clock Modes KML 1 KML 2 KML 3 KML 4 KML 5 KML 6 KML 7 KML 8 KML F KML 10 KML 11 Physical Description Slot Use Dimensions Height Width Depth Power Requirements Supply Voltages Maximum Power Consumption Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity 1 54 Technical System Characteristics Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Full local support of all control signals Full local support of all control signals with the exception of RI Local support of C and DTE External DCE and DCE Internal and Loopback Internal Loopback and DCE DTE Adaptive Internal and DCE Kilomux 2100 Kilomux 2104 18 slot card cage 4 slot card cage Built in power supply Built in main link Built in common logic O optional slots 4 I O slots 2 power supply slots 2 main link slots 1 common logic slot 1 optional slot 12 1 O slots 19 rack mount front mounting or standalone unit 13 26 cm 5 22 in 3U 4 4 cm 1 75 in 1U 43 7 cm 17 20 in 43 0 cm 17 30 in 25 25 cm 9 94 in 25 4 cm 10 in 100 to 240 VAC 10 50 60 Hz 24 VDC or 48 VDC 100 to 240 VAC 10 50 60 Hz 24 VDC or 48 VDC 20
102. SWITCH command is activated or until reset Refer to DISCONNECT SWITCH on page F 32 Format CONNECT SWITCH A B Use e Type CONNECT SWITCH A lt ENTER gt or CONNECT SWITCH B lt ENTER gt Use of this command is dependant on the configuration of the local Kilomux The main link A or B must be attached to a KML 10 card whose parameters set by the command DEF ML are main_link_mode SWITCH switch_mode MANUAL and the main link is master in_num_mode NONE set by the command DEF ML CALL Before using this command be sure that the calling numbers are initiated refer to the command DEF ML CALL The link will remain connected until the use of the command DISCONNECT SWITCH or Kilomux is reset Commands F 5 Appendix F Command Set Description DATE DEF AGENDA F 6 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Purpose Set the date for the Kilomux internal real time clock Format DATE Use 1 To set the date type DATE lt ENTER gt Kilomux sends the date entry form 2 Bring the cursor to the first field to be changed by pressing ENTER 3 To change the selected field press F to increase and B to decrease the displayed value When done press ENTER to move to the next field 4 To end press ENTER after the YEAR field Kilomux will display the time and date fields note that the date has changed follow
103. TAGE indicators light Operating Kilomux 1 Quick Start Guide 3 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Check the Kilomux configuration refer to Checking Current Operating Configuration in the Operation chapter Check the normal Kilomux operating indications refer to Normal Indications in the Operation chapter Kilomux has diagnostic functions that can be used to test the proper operation of the Kilomux system and identify the faulty components For an explanation of the Kilomux diagnostic functions refer to the Diagnostics chapter Turn off Kilomux as follows If Kilomux 2100 includes a KM RINGER module then turn off the KM RINGER before Kilomux 2100 For the Kilomux 2100 s KPS modules and Kilomux 2104 set the ON OFF switches on the rear panels to OFF Setting Up the Local Configuration To set up the Kilomux local configuration for more detailed information refer to Setting Configuration Parameters in the Configuring Kilomux chapter 1 Set the system parameters refer to Configuring the System Parameters in the Configuring Kilomux chapter Select the main link parameters refer to Configuring the Main Link Parameters in the Configuring Kilomux chapter Select the channel parameters refer to Configuring the Channel Parameters in the Configuring Kilomux chapter 4 Controlling Kilomux from a Supervisory Port To control Kilomux from a supervisory port for more detailed instructions re
104. THE The main link s link address and the gateway main link s IP address need to be at the same subnet The subnet is the first three fields of the IP address EGAL COMBINATION OF INT E ECHO CANCELL You are trying to disable the echo canceller of a voice module e g KVC 2 etc when its interface is 2 WIRE This is not allowable because when the link connecting between the subscribers includes hybrids the quality of transmission without echo cancellers is degraded E AND HARDWARE CONFIGURATION CONFLICT The Kilomux is equipped with only one KML module but you are trying to select a main link mode that requires two KML modules i e only the SINGLE mode is allowed CONFLICT BETWEEN CH1 AND CH2 SPEE e You are trying to configure channels 1 and 2 of a KLS 1 module to operate with data rates from different groups This is not allowed e For the KVF 4 SO module you cannot select a 64 kbps rate for both the B1 and B2 channel EGAL START TIM E SLOT ALLOCATION You are selecting an incorrect starting time slot on the KVF 5 master module EGAL SIGNALING MODE You are selecting an incorrect signaling parameter in KVF 5 or KVF 6 modules Configuration Error Messages B 13 Appendix B Alarms Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual ERROR 59 CONFLICT BE EN GROUPS DESTINATION
105. Test Indicator Reset Switch Test Indicator Alarm Indicator Alarm Indicator Supervisory Port Supervisory Port Connector Connector C o N T R o L UTP Ethernet Connector Dial Port Connector Amzamzram External DIP Switch External DIP Switch Alarm Relay c Alarm Relay ALM RLY ALM RLY Figure 2 5 Module KCL 2 Rear Panel Table 2 6 Module KCL 2 Rear Panel Function Pressing the RESET push button causes the reinitialization of all the modules in the Kilomux enclosure Indicates that a test or test loop is being performed on one of the local Kilomux modules or on the main link modem When downloading is activated the TEST indicator lights when a test is activated by the remote Kilomux modules Indicates that a fault has been detected in one of the Kilomux modules CONTROL 9 pin D type female connector for connection to an optional ASCII Supervisory Port supervision terminal or to a RADView network management station connector Connector pin allocation is given in Appendix A MNG ETHERNET One of the following according to Management Port interface option connector ordered External DIP switch SW2 ALM RLY connector 2 18 Interfaces and Connections e 9 pin D type female connector used as a Dial Port dial in dial out e UTP connector to an Ethernet ne
106. Your undertaking in this paragraph shall survive the termination of this Agreement This Agreement is effective upon your opening of the Kilomux 2100 2104 package and shall continue until terminated RAD may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term hereof Upon such termination by RAD you agree to return to RAD the Kilomux 2100 2104 and all copies and portions thereof For further information contact RAD at the address below or contact your local distributor International Headquarters U S Headquarters RAD Data Communications Ltd RAD Data Communications Inc 24 Raoul Wallenberg St 900 Corporate Drive Tel Aviv 69719 Israel Mahwah NJ 07430 USA Tel 972 3 6458181 Tel 201 529 1100 Toll free 1 800 444 7234 Fax 972 3 6498250 Fax 201 529 5777 E mail market rad com E mail market radusa com 1988 2004 RAD Data Communications Ltd Publication No 425 200 11 04 Limited Warranty RAD warrants to DISTRIBUTOR that the hardware in the Kilomux 2100 2104 to be delivered hereunder shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of twelve 12 months following the date of shipment to DISTRIBUTOR If during the warranty period any component part of the equipment becomes defective by reason of material or workmanship and DISTRIBUTOR immediately notifies RAD of such defect RAD shall have the option to choose the appropriate corrective action a supply a replacem
107. a rate and or in the data rate of Kilomux channels Commands F 17 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Format DEF FRAME Use 1 To perform manual bit allocation on the desired main link type DEF FRAME A lt ENTER gt or DEF FRAME B lt ENTER gt A typical DEF FRAME screen is shown below ED HIGHWAY F DATA START 000 014 The screen displays the current main link used by each module in ascending order of slot numbers and number of main link bits required for each module The screen fields are as follows OPERATED_HIGHWAY Displays the main link on which the module installed in the corresponding slot is allocated bandwidth this parameter is selected by means of the DEF CON command SIZE Displays the total number of bits assigned to the module installed in the corresponding slot this parameter is determined by the parameters selected for the corresponding by means of the DEF CH command DATA_START Displays the number of the first bit in the block of bits assigned to the module installed in the corresponding slot 2 You can change the order in which modules are assigned blocks of bits on the main link To perform the change bring the cursor to the desired field and then scroll using the F and B keys to display the desired number Norg Appendix B in the Installation and Operation Manual
108. acnedaehastessinadeeeiaiaseeteagieusstendebeiaeaabeeaastae 1 19 1 3 Example of Bandwidth AlGCatons c sais9sicvanus tavanaaneiindasiansea sntacuasvetonannnenssaaivardbanseneerssneiaanoanns 1 20 1 4 KML F Fiber Optic Interface Characteristics ssacssisveiandessuraiansenccnasoneaticsauntianee decane cuenenteatenns 1 52 2 1 Power Consumption of Kilomux ModuleS s ssseessssessesssiessisrsrssrsesssrsrrsresrssrsrrnrsrreresrsrenrsse 2 4 2 2 Nominal Power Consumption of Power Supply Modules s sssssssssesserssierierssrsessessrreresrsresrsse 2 6 2 3 DCE and DTE Interfacing Mode Control Lines sssssssssssessssssssrsisisisrnsistssssenesersrnensssrnenens 2 9 2 4 MNG Connector Control IMGs sicssicassuastts bea tenrdstustandinnsauidaunes des sedaudbiatannsdunssdiaulaacansientauiius 2 11 2 5 KPS Modules Rear Panels cccccccccccsssssseceeecececeesssnesecececececsessesssseeeeeeceeesesssseeeeeesesenensaaees 2 16 2 6 Module KCL 2 Rear Panel ccccccccccsessssecececececesesesseseeececeeeceesssseeeeeceeeceeeessaeeeeeeseeeeensaaees 2 18 2 7 Kilomux 2104 Rear Panel Components sscssisaedsasvadasshioedadienmeanciesabaessienduashunatss iuehisudeannatesinnbs 2 20 2 8 Typical Terminal Control SCQUENCES siassctavasiinssaarsenagnarnaowannnusieigaayntayansinneioaannesyana suensuaasnursanoanin 2 22 4 1 General Command Op NS acca ses excsarcnaadiain cia vennexsaciosdaasanspus eara eaS Aa EN ar ESE EEE ERTE 4 2 4 2 Kilom x Command Set Index
109. ailable selections When the desired selection is displayed press the space bar to move to the next field 3 When done press ENTER The second line of parameters is displayed The following is a typical display LOG OFF AUXILIARY DE E ROUTING PROTOCOL NO NMS_SLIP NONE The network parameters and their values are listed in Table F 3 Commands F 25 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table F 3 Network Parameters Designation Function Values SPEED Selects the network port data rate The available values are 9600 19200 38400 and 57600 bps DATA Selects the number of data bits in the 7 or 8 data bits network port word format PARITY Controls the use of parity ODD Odd parity EVEN Even parity NO Parity disabled only available with 8 data bits CALL_OUT_MODE Controls the use of the call out function Note If the network port interface is configured as DCE this field displays NO to indicate that the call out function is disabled NO Call out function is disabled YES Kilomux will initiate a call after each new alarm LOG OFF Controls the idle disconnect time NO Automatic session disconnect disabled 10_min Automatic disconnection after 10 minutes if no input data is received by the network port AUXILIARY DEVICE Selects the management mode supported by the network port Note At any time
110. ale connector designated Supervisory Port Connector CONTROL DCE e The allocation of pins in the Supervisory Port Connector with DCE emulation used for direct connection to the supervisory terminal is given in Table A 1 e The pin functions with DTE emulation used when a cross over cable is used for connection to a modem that provides the link to the supervisory terminal is given in Table A 2 Table A 1 Common Logic Module KCL 2 Supervisory Port Connector Pin Allocations for DCE Emulation Pin Designation Direction Connected to Terminal with 25 pin Connector 1 Data Carrier Detect DCD From Kilomux 8 2 Receive Data RD From Kilomux 3 3 Transmit Data TD To Kilomux 2 4 Data Terminal Ready DTR To Kilomux 20 5 Signal Ground SIG Common reference and DC power supply ground 7 Can be isolated from chassis ground AA strap selectable 6 Data Set Ready From Kilomux 7 Request to Send RTS To Kilomux 8 Clear to Send CTS From Kilomux 5 9 Ring Indicator RI To Kilomux 22 Supervisory Port Connector A 1 Appendix A Connection Data Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table A 2 Common Logic Module KCL 2 Supervisory Port Connector Pin Allocations for DTE Emulation Pin Designation FGND TD RD DCD CTS DTR SGND RTS 12V IS Nl an a BR wy rd per Oo 12V a RELAY M 4 No RELAY F w RELAY B _ A ALARM DSR RI No Nb r
111. and external To ensure that a reliable timing source is used even when the source selected to provide the preferred timing reference fails Kilomux allows the selection of an additional fallback source The fallback source is automatically connected when the main source fails If both the main and fallback sources fail Kilomux will switch to the internal oscillator The main characteristics of each main link timing mode are explained in the following sections Application Considerations 1 39 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual DTE Timing KML 1 KML 2 KML 3 KML 4 and KML 10 Modules With DTE timing both the main link receive and transmit paths of the Kilomux unit receive external clock signals Figure 1 28 shows two basic network configurations that use the DTE timing mode DTE Timing DTE Timing ootte Modem with Modem with Internal Timing Loopback Timing KILOMUX KILOMUX A Leased Line Configuration DTE Timing DTE Timing Digital Data Network Modem with Modem with Loopback Timing Loopback Timing KILOMUX KILOMUX B Digital Configuration Figure 1 28 Network Configurations Using DTE Timing In the leased line configuration A of Figure 1 28 two Kilomux units communicate through a leased line using two high speed modems or other transmission equipment e g higher speed digital multiplexers capable of supporting the
112. and installing it on the replacement module e If the above way is not possible the replacement module can be preconfigured in another Kilomux and then installed in the desired unit This allows the replacement of a defective KCL 2 module without disrupting the operation of the Kilomux because the Kilomux can continue to operate even if the KCL 2 module is temporarily removed If you insert a new KCL 2 module in an operating Kilomux 2100 without first either transferring the NVRAM or preconfiguring the module then when the KCL 2 module is inserted in the Kilomux 2100 the system is reset to the default values Test control is executed from the TEST OPTIONS menu In this chapter you will find information on the tests loops available on the main link interface modules and the main link modems You will also find a general description of the test functions applicable to I O modules Specific information on the tests available for each I O module is provided in the corresponding module Installation and Operation manual In this chapter local means the Kilomux unit at which the test command has been given i e it is always assumed the command has been given using the front panel controls of or a supervision terminal connected to the local Kilomux Do not set up a local loop in a remote Kilomux with in band management Doing so could cause the main link connection to be lost Main Link Loops 5 4 The Kilomux supports two types
113. andwidth and therefore it can carry traffic NO The channel cannot carry traffic e INTERFACE Shows the channel interface selected by means of the internal interface changer boards This field is relevant only to data I O modules with F 46 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description FRAME G732S CRC4 NO 00S F I GAIN LIMIT E1 T1 LOOP selectable interface e g KHS 1 for other modules this field shows NA not applicable e LOOP Indicates the tests and or loops that are currently activated on this channel or NONE For the list of tests and loops available on each module refer to the relevant module Installation and Operation Manual When using the KVF 5 I O module with A and B signaling this command displays the A and B signaling state Kilomux receives the A and B signaling state from the PBX The status display of a typical KVF 6 I O module adds the following information TIME SLOT GROUP DSP ST SYS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 For an explanation of the display fields refer to the Configuration chapter of the KVF 6 Installation and Operation Manual Purpose Display system status information Format DSP ST SYS option Use e To view the current system status type DSP ST SYS lt ENTER gt Display Format A typical system status display including typical m
114. are automatically switched over to the operational link When the management channel is carried by a main link time slot it is always handled as a high priority channel Switched Backup Operation Kilomux 2100 Only Kilomux 2100 provides a switched backup mode of operation that allows the use of dial up modems operating on low cost switched data lines PSTN mode or ISDN basic access lines as a backup to the main link ISDN backup mode based on the use of the KML 10 main link module Kilomux 2100 allows flexible programming of the switched backup option on a weekly basis For each day of the week it is possible to define up to four different time periods and to specify for each period whether the use of the switched backup function is allowed The backup capabilities can be determined in two ways e By entering the desired configuration in the alternate database stored by Kilomux 2100 This method allows the system administrator to freely select which channels will be transmitted when the backup link is in use and to specify for these channels different data rates when using the backup link Note that in this mode the alternate database is dedicated to the backup link so the day night configuration option cannot be used e By defining the channels to be carried when the backup link is used as high priority channels In this case the channel data rates cannot be changed with respect to normal operation but the backup configuration is
115. art signaling for direct connection to a PBX extension line e KVC 3 Low bit rate voice module provides two high quality compressed voice channels For more information refer to the KVC 3 Installation and Operation Manual The following versions are available KVC 3 E amp M two voice channels with four wire or two wire interface with E amp M signaling per RS 464 Types I Il Ill and V and British Telecom SSDC5 KVC 3 FXS two voice channels with two wire interface for direct connection to a telephone set KVC 3 FXSP similar to KVC 3 FXS except that it has an internal ringer and line feed supply KVC 3 FXO two voice channels with two wire interface and FXO loop start signaling for direct connection to a PBX extension line e KLS 1 Low speed RS 232 data module For more information refer to the KLS 1 Installation and Operation Manual e KLS 2 Low speed RS 232 four channel asynchronous statistical data module For more information refer to the KLS 2 Installation and Operation Manual e KHS 1 High speed data interface module provides two high speed V 35 RS 530 or RS 449 RS 422 data channels For more information refer to the KHS 1 Installation and Operation Manual e KHS 2 Two channel synchronous data module For more information refer to the KHS 2 Installation and Operation Manual Physical Description 1 13 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual e KHS U D
116. arting bit of the block in the frame of main link B This may differ from the starting bit on main link A Application Considerations 1 23 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Location A Location C Connected User Connected to Location B to Location B Bypassed Bits Link A Link B User Connected DA F to Location A KILOMUX KILOMUX Connected to Location C mi Location B KILOMUX 2100 User Connected User Connected to Location A to Location C Figure 1 13 Basic Bypassing Configuration Figure 1 14 shows an example of bit routing between the various units Since the bypassing is bit oriented the two Kilomux 2100 links can operate at different data rates but they must use bandwidth allocation units of equal sizes refer to Table 1 1 for allowable selections Therefore the bypassing can be performed between links operating at rates within the same group of rates e 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 or 32 kbps 0 4 kbps bandwidth allocation unit e 48 56 64 128 or 192 kbps 0 8 kbps bandwidth allocation unit e 256 or 384 kbps 1 6 kbps bandwidth allocation unit e 512 or 768 kbps 3 2 kbps bandwidth allocation unit e 1024 or 1536 kbps 6 4 kbps bandwidth allocation unit In order for the user to be able to specify the allocation of main link bits to the individual channels the structure of the main link frame must be specified by the user Therefore in a bypassing applicat
117. ata interface module provides one or two ISDN basic access rate type U interfaces The KHS U module enables the extension of ISDN lines over non ISDN facilities For more information refer to the KHS U Installation and Operation Manual The following versions are available KHS U S with one U interface KHS U D with two U interfaces e KHS 703 High speed data module that provides two independent 64 kbps co directional data channels per ITU T Rec G 703 Each module is terminated with an RJ 45 eight pin connector For more information refer to the KHS 703 Installation and Operation Guide further on in this manual e KVF 4 Voice fax relay module using advanced digital signal processing DSP techniques MPMLQ in accordance with ITU T Rec G 723 1 to provide one or two channels for transmission of voice and standard Group III fax signals over the Kilomux link with automatic switch over between voice and fax modes For more information refer to the KVF 4 Installation and Operation Manual The following versions are available a KVF 4 E amp M two channels with four wire or two wire interface with E amp M signaling per RS 464 Types I Il Ill and V and British Telecom SSDC5 KVF 4 E amp M E similar to the KVF 4 E amp M except that it requires an external 48 VDC source to supply the signaling voltage for increasing the maximum allowed line length KVF 4 FXS two voice channels with two wire interface for direct conn
118. ate lines A typical complete form is shown below The form presents the current parameter values as defaults PARITY INTERFACE DCD_DE NONE DCE 10 LOG OFF AUXILIARY DE NO NMS_SLIP 2 Change parameters as follows Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by pressing the space bar To change the selected field press F or B to scroll among the available selections When the desired selection is displayed press the space bar to move to the next field 3 After the desired parameter values are selected press ENTER to end Kilomux will display the time and date fields followed by the Kilomux prompt In addition to the parameters listed in Supervisory Port Configuration Parameters in the Configuration Parameters appendix Table F 4 lists parameters that can be programmed only from the terminal Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description Table F 4 Terminal Programmed Parameters Designation Function Values SPEED Selects the data rate 9 6 19 2 38 4 or 57 6 kbps CTS ON The CTS line is always ON active RTS The CTS line follows the RTS line DCD_DELAY With the Kilomux supervisory port 0 10 50 100 200 300 msec defined as DTE indicates delay in msec between DCD ON and the sending of data PWD Controls password protection YES Password is protected NO Password is not prot
119. aths formed when certain loops or tests are active inherently disconnect the signal paths required by other loops As a typical example consider the case of a main link remote loop if such a loop is activated on the local Kilomux in response to a command sent through the management channel by the remote Kilomux then the operator of the local Kilomux can no longer activate a local main link ITU T Rec V 54 loop e On the local Kilomux the following combinations of loops are not possible Simultaneous activation of local and remote main link loops CONFIG ERROR 3 Simultaneous activation of main link ITU T Rec V 54 loop 2 and loop 3 CONFIG ERROR 3 Simultaneous activation of local and remote loops on the same channel CONFIG ERROR 4 Simultaneous activation of local loop and PRBS transmission on the same data channel CONFIG ERROR 4 Simultaneous activation of local loop and BERT test on the same channel CONFIG ERROR 4 Simultaneous activation of local loop and tone injection on the same voice channel CONFIG ERROR 4 5 2 Diagnostic Tests Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Diagnostics Test Options Operating Instructions The following provide detailed instructions for e Activating deactivating PRBS transmission on a data channel e Activating deactivating BERT testing on a data channel e Activating deactivating tone injection on a voice channel e Displaying the state of chan
120. ay the IP and SNMP agent parameters Display the contents of the alarm buffer and optionally clear the buffer Display the result of the BERT test running on an I O module channel Display information on connected channels Display hardware faults detected during the power on self test and during normal operation Kilomux Supervision Language Chapter 4 Operation Options AB AB IC ICA IC 4 5 Chapter 4 Operation 4 6 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table 4 2 Kilomux Command Set Index Cont Command Purpose Options DSP FLIP Display cause of last main link flip DSP MANAGER Display the network management station to which the SNMP agent LIST sends traps DSP KVF5 or Display the configuration parameters of a group of KVF 5 modules PBX DSP KVF6 Display the configuration parameters of the KVF 6 modules in the Kilomux DSP PRBS_INJ Display the result of the PRBS test running on an I O module channel C DSP REM Display the other Kilomux connected to the local Kilomux AGENT DSP REV Display the hardware and software revisions of the modules l DSP SIG or Display the signaling bits state in KVF 5 or KVF 6 modules SIGNALING DST ST FRAME Display information on current frame usage current bit allocation as DSP ST FR defined in the active database DSP ST ML Display active main link status information DSP ST SLOT Display I O module status information DSP ST SYS Display system status EDIT DB Select the a
121. be defined using the front panel controls and the LCD ERROR 20 EGAL COMMAND MODULE NOT INSTALL The slot whose number has been specified in the command is empty ERROR 21 EGAL COMMAND CHANNEL IS DISCONNE The channel whose number is specified in the command is not connected NC You must connect the channel before specifying its number in a configuration command ERROR 22 LOOP IS NOT ACTIVE You are trying to deactivate a loop that currently is not activated ERROR 23 EGAL LOOP FOR INSTALLED MODULI The loop you are trying to activate is not supported by the module whose number has been specified in the command ERROR 24 EGAL COMMAND FOR CURRENT ML MODE The command you have entered is not allowed in the current main link mode ERROR 25 CONFLICT BE EN CTRL SIG PARAMETER AND MODULE The value entered in the CONTROL SIGNALING field is not supported by the module whose number has been specified in the command ERROR 26 1 E MISMATCH B EN DATABASE AND HARDWAR The module type recorded in the Kilomux data base differs from the module sensed by the Kilomux Configuration Error Messages B 11 Appendix B Alarms Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual ERROR 27 EGAL CLOCK SELECTION FOR MODULE The selected timing mode is not supp
122. but enough bandwidth is left for data transfer ML_MODE When the Kilomux 2100 includes two KML modules you must define how to use the modules SINGLE Single main link operation _REDUND The two KML modules operate as a redundant pair DUAL LNK The two KML modules provide two independent links PRI BMP The two KML modules provide two parallel links with priority bumping SW BACK One of the KML modules serves as the main link and the other module serves as a switched backup link SWITCH Single main link over an ISDN line DUAL SWITCH Two main links over an ISDN line SINGLE and SWITCH One main link operation and one main link over an ISDN line ACTIVE_ML When redundancy is enabled you must specify the active KML module AUTO Automatic selection of active module in accordance with the redundancy switch over criteria The module is selected as default after power up is KML A ML A Module KML A is selected as the active module Redundancy is disabled ML B Module KML B is selected as the active module Redundancy is disabled You can use the ML A and ML B selections to enforce the selection of a certain active module and then enable again the redundancy function by selecting AUTO Setting Configuration Parameters 3 3 Chapter 3 Configuring Kilomux Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Configuring the Main Link Parameters Note For a list of the main l
123. cally identified and processed Connection of Supervision Terminal A supervision terminal can be connected either directly to the Kilomux SP CONTROL DCE supervisory port or through a modem or any other type of full duplex data link Kilomux supports only a dial in connection Handshaking Protocol CONTROL DCE Port The handshaking between Kilomux and the equipment connected to it supervision terminal RADview management station modem etc uses the control lines in the Kilomux SP connector The control lines being used in the DCE and DTE interfacing mode and the direction of the control signals are detailed in the following chart Table 2 3 DCE and DTE Interfacing Mode Control Lines Control Line Interface Type DCE DTE CTS Out Not used DCD Out Out DSR Out Out DTR In In RI Not used In RTS In In Data Terminal Ready DTR The equipment connected to the SP port must set the DTR line ON active to gain control over Kilomux and start a management session When the DTR is ON the Kilomux front panel controls are disabled and the LCD shows TERMINAL ON LINE To end the current session the DTR line is switched OFF inactive This ends the control connection and returns the control to the Kilomux front panel If password protection is used the password must be entered again the next time the DTR line is switched ON to start a new session Request to Send RTS The RTS line is normally O
124. cator RI IN 22 MNG Connector A 3 Appendix A Connection Data Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual A 4 Alarm Relay Connector The Alarm Relay connector is a 6 pin RJ 12 connector with dry contacts for relaying alarms from the Kilomux to activate external equipment The Alarm Relay connector can also be used to relay external equipment information to the Kilomux Connector pin functions are given in the following table Table A 4 Alarm Relay Connector Pinout Pin Direction Designation Function 1 Out 5V 5 VDC output 2 In Out Relay F Main relay Common contact 3 In Out Relay M Main relay NC Normally Closed contact 4 In Out Relay B Main relay NO Normally Open contact 5 In Out FGND 6 In FAN Fan status input active low TTL A 5 DC Power Input Connector The DC input power connector used on the KM 2104 and the KPS 3 KPS 5 KPS 7 and DC powered KM Ringer modules is a 3 pin terminal block type connector Connector pin functions are marked on the panel Refer to the DC Power Supply Connection Supplement at the end of this manual for details A 4 DC Power Input Connector Appendix B Alarms B 1 Alarm Messages Table B 1 lists the Kilomux alarm messages For each alarm an alarm text message is displayed on the terminal In addition to the text each message has a code number Table B 1 lists the messages in ascending order of their code numbers and in addition indicates their type state or eve
125. cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Canadian Emission Requirements This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulation Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada Warning per EN 55022 CISPR 22 Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user will be required to take adequate measures Cet appareil est un appareil de Classe A Dans un environnement r sidentiel cet Avertissement appareil peut provoquer des brouillages radio lectriques Dans ces cas il peut tre demand a l utilisateur de prendre les mesures appropri es Dieses ist ein Ger t der Funkst rgrenzwertklasse A In Wohnbereichen k nnen Achtung bei Betrieb dieses Ger tes Rundfunkstr rungen auftreten in welchen Fallen der Benutzer f r entsprechende Gegenma nahmen verantwortlich ist Conventions Note A note draws attention to a general rule for a procedure or to exceptions to a rule A caution warns of possible damage to the equipment if a procedure is not ution pale followed correctly servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the equipment If these 1 A warning alerts to the presence of important operating and maintenance instructions are not f
126. ceive timing is recovered from the signal received from the user s terminal equipment 1 48 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information Timing of Channels with S Interface The transmit timing of a channel with S interface such as a KVF 4 SO module depends on the selected operating mode Sub Link Timing NT Mode Kilomux provides the transmit clock for the S interface The receive timing is recovered from the signal received from the user s terminal equipment TE Mode One of the S interface ports connected to the network termination NT unit must be selected as an external clock source for Kilomux Thus the Kilomux nodal clock and therefore the transmit timing of the S interface are locked to the timing of the NT unit The KVF 5 modules include a standard T1 or E1 sub link interface The following timing options are available T1 E1 Line Signal The receive clock of the sub link is always derived from the incoming T1 or E1 line signal and the transmit clock is derived from the nodal timing source of Kilomux Recovered Receive Clock The recovered receive clock of the sub link can be selected as the reference for the Kilomux nodal timing If this option is not used the equipment connected to the sub link must operate with loopback timing or its timing must be locked to the same source that serves as the reference for the Kilomux nodal timing Main Li
127. cified I O slot SLOT i 1 through 12 of the local Kilomux unit lost synchronization 18 MAIN LINK FLIP Event The Kilomux switched to operation on the second OCCURRED main link This message can be displayed only when the redundancy mode is used 19 ML LOSS OF SIGNAL State The KML 5 module installed in the specified slot SLOT i ML A ML B does not receive data only for KML 5 module 20 MODULE WAS Event The module that was previously installed in the REMOVED SLOT i specified slot ML A ML B and 1 through 12 has been physically removed or has been reset or the communication with the module failed 21 MAIN LINK BACKUP Event The connection of the switched backup link failed B 2 DIAL FAILURE Alarm Messages This message can be displayed only when the switched backup mode is selected Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarms Table B 1 Alarm Messages Cont Code Message Terminal Alarm Description Type 22 SWITCHED BACKUP Event The switched backup link has been successfully ML IS ACTIVE connected and is actively carrying traffic This message can be displayed only when the switched backup mode is selected 23 MAIN LINK RECOVERY Event The main link has returned to normal operation This message can be displayed only when the switched backup or priority bumping mode is selected 24 MAIN LINK FLIP ML A Event Main link A is now the active link after a flip from link B This message can be displayed o
128. contained in the on line database Therefore it is possible to prepare day night configurations using the two Kilomux 2100 databases Switched Backup Using Dial up Modems A typical PSTN switched backup configuration is shown in Figure 1 17 In this configuration one of the links is configured to carry the normal traffic and the other link is configured to serve as the backup link 1 28 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information v Yn 2 ive Li 3 5 Active Link 3 3 o V a a N SD EEE Switched gt 1 Backup Link zZ KILOMUX 2100 KILOMUX 2100 Switched Data Network pisas HN A n Et EEEE Figure 1 17 Typical Switched Backup Configuration Since usually the data rate supported by dial up modems does not exceed 19 2 kbps the backup link can also be configured for operation at 9 6 or 19 2 kbps This means that in case of a main link failure only a fraction of the normal traffic carried by the channels defined by the system administrator as having high priority can still be transmitted When a failure occurs on the main link a Kilomux 2100 activates the DTR line in the backup link interface connector The dial up modem connected to this link dials a preprogrammed number to set up a call to the other Kilomux 2100 After the called destination answers the traffic is switched to the backup link if the call cannot be establis
129. ctory Software components in the Kilomux 2100 2104 are provided as is and without warranty of any kind RAD disclaims all warranties including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose RAD shall not be liable for any loss of use interruption of business or indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any kind In spite of the above RAD shall do its best to provide error free software products and shall offer free Software updates during the warranty period under this Agreement RAD s cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any claims demands or actions arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the Kilomux 2100 2104 shall not exceed the sum paid to RAD for the purchase of the Kilomux 2100 2104 In no event shall RAD be liable for any indirect incidental consequential special or exemplary damages or lost profits even if RAD has been advised of the possibility of such damages This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of Israel General Safety Instructions The following instructions serve as a general guide for the safe installation and operation of telecommunications products Additional instructions if applicable are included inside the manual gt Warning gt B Warning Safety Symbols This symbol may appear on the equipment or in the text It indicates potential safety
130. d by ITU T Rec H i G 704 for the frames transmitted on the E1 line and the checking of the check bits carried by the received E1 frames This parameter is available only on the KML 8 module Default NO CODE Selects the line coding method used TRAN Transparent AMI coding no for zero suppression on the T1 link of processing for zero suppression the KML 7 module B7ZS B7ZS coding B8ZS B8ZS coding Note Clear channel capability is available only with B8ZS coding Default B8ZS FUNCTION Displays the function of the link On KML 7 module only interface of the KML 7 and KML 8 modules DSU The module has a DSU link interface CSU The module has a CSU link interface On KML 8 module only DSU The module has an LTU link interface General E 5 Appendix E Configuration Parameters E 6 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table E 2 Main Link Parameters Cont Designation Function Values MASK Controls the transmit signal For link interfaces without CSU characteristics of the KML 7 module The following selections indicate the line The displayed options depend on the length in feet Too ae with or Length ft Display 5 0 133 000 When the link interface does not 133 266 133 include a CSU the transmit signal 266 399 266 mask can be selected in accordance 399 533 399 with the transmit line length to meet 533 655 533 DSX 1 requirements as specified by FCC68A Compliance with AT am
131. d by the Kilomux prompt 4 After the last change press ENTER The second line of the data form used to control the use of the switched backup link is displayed Zone 2 Zone 3 Zon END START END START END START hh mm hh mm YES YES 5 Use the procedure described above to select the desired value for each period YES The use of the switched backup link is allowed NO The use of the switched backup link is not allowed 6 After the desired parameter values are selected press ENTER to end Kilomux will display the time and date fields followed by the Kilomux prompt DEF AGENT Purpose Display and modify the current SNMP agent parameters Norg To enable SNMP and TELNET management it is necessary to define all the parameters Format DEF AGENT Commands F 7 Appendix F Command Set Description F 8 Commands 1 2 3 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Use Type DEF AGENT lt ENTER gt Kilomux displays the following SNMP data form ENT PARAME RESS IS XXX XXX XXX XXX ET MASK IS R XXX XXX XXX XXX ULT GATEWAY IS XXX XXX XXX XXX COMMUNITY IS public E COMMUNITY IS private COMMUNITY IS public NET APATHY TIME 10 MIN DDRESS 999 999 999 ET MASK 999 999 999 ULT GATEWAY 99979997 9997 P READ COMMUNITY P WRITE COMMUNITY P TRAP COMMUNITY
132. d lines displays LEASED LINE e ISDN DISCONNECT CAUSE displays the last disconnect cause code The codes are in the range of 001 through 127 and they comply with the ITU T Rec Q 921 e ISDN CALL STATUS Displays the status of the ISDN call in which the KML 10 module is engaged DIALING The call is being set up CONNECTED The call is connected DISCONNECTING The call is in the process of being disconnected DISCONNECTED The call has been disconnected e ISDN LAYER Displays the current state of the layer 1 protocol CONNECTED Layer 1 is connected DISCONNECTED Layer 1 is not connected e ISDN LAYER2 Displays the current state of the layer 2 protocol CONNECTED Layer 2 is connected DISCONNECTED Layer 2 is not connected DSP ST SLOT Purpose Display information on the module installed in one of the slots OP and I O slots 1 through 12 Format DSP ST i Use e To display information on the module installed in the desired I O slot type DSP ST i lt ENTER gt Commands F 45 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Where i is the I O slot number in the range of 1 through 12 or OP for the OPTIONS slot Display Format A typical DSP ST SLOT status is shown below module type module type E REVISION XX YY E REVISION XX YY E FAILURE YES NO HIGHWAY ML A CONNECT INT YES V35 NO V35
133. d link on a Kilomux 2104 This is not supported ERROR 214 LOCAL REM SLOTS OP HIGHWAY OR ML PRIORITII INCOMPATIBLI Check configuration of main link priorities for all the modules ERROR 215 KM2104 OFFSE ENT MISMATCH The current offset and the offset in the edited data base are different ERROR 218 ONLY ONE KDI KDI CH IS ALLOWED IN A MUX Only one KDI or KDI CH can be installed or programmed in a Kilomux ERROR 226 ML BITWEIGHT MISMATCH When performing manual frame allocation the two Kilomux connected in a link must have equal bandwidth allocation units refer to the General Information chapter ERROR 234 KVF 5 SLAVE CARDS MUST HAV Make sure a KVF 5 T1 M or KVF 5 E1 M module is installed ERROR 235 TOO MANY KVF 5 CARDS IN THE MUX The total number of KVF 5 modules inserted in the Kilomux exceeds the maximum number needed to process the T1 or E1 signal ERROR 236 INVALID KVF 5 TS GROUP You are trying to select an incorrect group of time slots on a KVF 5 slave module Configuration Error Messages B 15 Appendix B Alarms Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual B 16 Configuration Error Messages Appendix C SNMP Management C 1 Scope This appendix provides the specific information required for the management of the Kilomux equipment by means of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP C 2 SNMP Environment General
134. d takes effect and the Kilomux prompt reappears Purpose Enables static routing of management information to network devices that do not support the proprietary RIP routing protocol used by the Kilomux The IP addresses of such devices should be defined here By using this command you can declare an IP address on the list as an Ethernet address When an agent searches for this IP address it will be directed to the Ethernet Format DEF ROUTE Use e Type Def route lt ENT ER gt The Kilomux displays the following data form RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Hesa 44q9q949q49q4 HARA Ae ee ES Hesssss4 Sc sine HHHHHHHHHH ao iao Biao Mav iao ao toy DPPP a a a a OO OTD OB L GO O60 0 0 PEs Aa git GU ce pay et ce PPP PPP LP A A ww HUOO NG URA WU NH Commands F 27 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual DEF SP F 28 Commands Purpose Assign values to supervisory port parameters See section Supervisory Port Configuration Parameters in Appendix E for parameter description and allowable ranges and section Configuring the SP Parameters in Chapter 3 for practical selection recommendations Format DEF SP Use 1 Type DEF SP lt ENTER gt The supervisory port parameters data form is displayed The data form lists the parameters on two separ
135. d to return to normal operation after a failure on the main link is corrected NOTE When using switched backup mode the recovery is performed upon manual FLIP ML command MANUAL Recovery upon manual command AUTO Automatic recovery The criterion for recovery is controlled by means of the FLIP_INTEG time FRAME_MODE Selects the main link bit allocation MANUAL Manual allocation This is mode the mode required for using the bypassing and multidrop functions supported by the KDI module AUTO Automatic allocation LINK_CLK When a KDI module is installed in ML A Main link B timing is locked to Kilomux 2100 selects the timing main link A timing reference for the main links ML B Main link A timing is locked to main link B timing NONE Main link A and main link B derive their timing references from the same external clock source which is selected by means of the CLK_MASTER and CLK_FBACK fields FLIP_INTEG Specifies the integration interval for SHORT normal interval determining whether it is necessary to LONG longer interval used if the link switch to the backup link and to is marginal and it is necessary to wait a detect TELUS normal operation ofa longer time before declaring that the failed link when using the AUTO link has indeed returned to normal method for main link recovery operation RESET_VOICE Not in use Always set to DISABLE 2 After the desired parameter values are selected pres
136. dB 12dBm 28dB single mode 1 4 I O Module Applications There are many applications for the different Kilomux I O modules For details refer to the corresponding sections of the I O modules in Part II of this manual 1 52 I O Module Applications Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Main Link Number of Main Links Multiplexing Technique Multiplexing Efficiency Bit Rates dependant on KML type Interface amp Connector Type KML 1 Module KML 2 Module KML 3 Module KML 4 Module KML 5 Module KML 6 Module KML 7 Module KML 8 Module KML 10 S Module KML 10 U Module KML 11 Module KML F Module Chapter 1 General Information 1 5 Technical System Characteristics Kilomux 2100 1 or 2 Kilomux 2104 1 Time Division Bit Interleaved Typically 98 5 9 6 14 4 19 2 32 48 56 64 128 192 256 384 512 768 1024 1536 kbps V 35 34 pin female connector V 24 RS 232 25 pin D type female connector V 36 RS 422 RS 530 25 pin D type female connector X 21 15 pin D type female connector G 703 codirectional RJ 45 8 pin connector Standard DDS RJ 48 8 pin connector T1 link 100Q balanced RJ 45 8 pin connector E1 link 120Q balanced RJ 48 8 pin connector E1 link 75Q balanced two BNC connector S type interface 100Q balanced RJ 45 8 pin connector U type interface 135Q balanced RJ 45 8 pin connector 10BaseT 100BaseT RJ 45 8 pin connector 10BaseF 100BaseF MT
137. e 1 21 Single and Switch Mode The ISDN line does not need to be connected or available to all applications at all times The different switch modes can allocate the ISDN line as follows Connect after power up Configures Kilomux to connect the ISDN line from power up until power off Using this option the ISDN line is always open during a Kilomux session Manual Configures Kilomux to trigger the ISDN line connection only upon operator request by using the Connect Switch command The ISDN line remains open until the operator requests to disconnect by using the Disconnect Switch command For information on the Connect Switch and Disconnect Switch commands refer to the Command Set Description appendix Automatic Configures Kilomux to automatically connect the ISDN line when an I O request is made The data cards KLS 1 N KLS 2 KHS 1 and KHS 2 and the KVF 4 voice card analog interfaces only provide a trigger to automatically connect the ISDN line These data and voice cards must be assigned a high priority via the DEF CON command to allow the trigger to begin dialing After the I O transfer is completed the ISDN line is automatically disconnected Kilomux sets the priority levels for the data and voice cards 1 32 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information System Management Equipment Management Methods Kilomux supports the following management methods
138. e previously used link ML LOCAL SYNC LOSS Flipping occurred because the local KML module serving the previously used link lost frame synchronization ML REMOTE SYNC LOSS Flipping occurred because the remote KML module serving the previously used link lost frame synchronization ON LINE ML REMOVED Flipping occurred because the KML module that was previously on line has been removed from its slot Purpose Display the results of the last hardware test of the KCL and KPS modules made during power up self test and during regular operation Format DSP HDR TST Use e To display the hardware test report type DSP HDR TST lt ENTER gt Display Format The display shows NO ERROR if everything checks well or lists the detected problem DATABASE DATABASE I O EXPANDE COUNTER E PS A 5 VOL PS A 12 VOL PS B 5 VOL PS B 12 VO Refer to the Alarms appendix for an interpretation of the error messages Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description DSP MANAGER LIST Purpose Display the network management stations to which the SNMP agent of Kilomux sends traps Each network management station is displayed by its IP address and the corresponding subnet mask Format DSP MANAGER LIST Use e To display all the IP and SUBNET MASK addresses type DSP MANAGER LIST lt ENTER gt
139. eceives data according to the clock received from the modems that connect it to the transmission equipment To compensate for jitter and short term instabilities elastic buffers are used at the input and output of each channel 2 bits for KLS 1 data modules and 4 bits for KHS 1 modules The DTE2 clock mode is required in various applications such as data channels connected to a digital data switch The data switch provides the clock signal for both Kilomux and the equipment connected to Kilomux Figure 1 40 The clock signals are received from the modems serving the data channel Application Considerations 1 47 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual When operating channels in the DTE2 clock mode one of the data channels can be selected as the external timing reference source for the entire system timing The external timing option is always used because it ensures the main link transmit and receive data rates are locked to the corresponding channel rates If the main link data rates are not locked to the corresponding channel rates bit integrity will be lost Kilomux units integrated in a large network that includes a master timing reference ensures locked timing without the use of external timing The master timing source is used by all the equipment in the network This includes data equipment connected to the Kilomux channels and the transmission equipment serving the main link Do not use
140. ected LOG_OFF Controls the idle disconnect time NO Automatic session disconnection disabled 10_MIN Automatic disconnection after ten minutes if no input data is received by the Kilomux supervisory port DSR ON The DSR line is continuously on It will DTR The DSR line tracks the DTR switch to OFF for five seconds after the line When INTERFACE DTE the DSR DTR line is switched OFF line will switch to ON for five seconds when the RI line is ON while the DTR line is OFF POP_ALM Controls the automatic display of YES The terminal automatically alarms on the terminal displays every 10 minutes the alarm status or whenever a new ON alarm is received or an ON OFF alarm changes state from OFF to ON NO The automatic display feature is disabled AUXILIARY DEVICE Selects the management mode supported by the Control port Note At any time only one of the two ports of the KCL 2 module can be used for management access NONE Control port is not operational TERMINAL Control port supports only management by means of a supervision terminal NMS SLIP The Control port connects to an SNMP management station and or TELNET host using the SLIP protocol AGENT SLIP The network port is connected to another agent port using the SLIP protocol NMS PPP Same as NMS SLIP except the PPP protocol is used AGENT PPP Same as AGENT SLIP except the PPP protocol is used Note The SLIP and PPP selections are s
141. ection to PBXs KVF 5 E1 M KVF 5 master module with balanced and unbalanced E1 sub link interfaces for connection to PBXs a KVF 5 T1 S basic KVF 5 slave module without trunk interface a KVF 5 E1 S basic KVF 5 slave module without trunk interface KVF 6 Voice fax compression module provides direct connection to E1 T1 PBX trunks For more information refer to the Installation and Operation Manual KVF 8 Provides high quality digital compression of eight analog voice fax channels For more information refer to the KVF 8 Installation and Operation Manual KTRE Token ring extender module For more information refer to the KTRE Installation and Operation Manual KMBE Ethernet Bridge Router module For more information refer to the KMBE Installation and Operation Manual KMBE N Two channel Ethernet bridge router module For more information refer to the KMBE N Installation and Operation Manual Physical Description 1 15 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 1 3 Application Considerations Basic Kilomux System I O Modules Basic System Structure The basic Kilomux system consists of two Kilomux units connected by a single link as shown in Figure 1 9 I O Modules KILOMUX KILOMUX Figure 1 9 Basic Kilomux System Structure System Multiplexing Capabilities To provide the flexibility necessary to support up to 12 I O modules of various types for
142. ection to a telephone set _KVF 4 FXS3 similar to KVF 4 FXS except that it supports pulse metering and polarity reversal KVF 4 FXSP similar to KVF 4 FXS except that it has an internal ringer and line feed supply KVF 4 FXSW one channel similar to the channels of the KVF 4 FXS and one two wire interface operating with FXO signaling intended for connection to the PSTN or to a PBX extension line _KVF 4 FXO two channels with two wire interface and FXO loop start signaling for direct connection to a PBX extension line KVF 4 FXO3 similar to KVF 4 FXO except that it supports pulse metering and polarity reversal _KVF 4 SO one ISDN basic rate access type S interface for direct connection to an ISDN PBX 1 14 Physical Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information KVF 5 Voice fax relay module with T1 or E1 PBX trunk interface uses advanced digital signal processing DSP techniques MPMLQ Multi pulse Maximum Likelihood Quantization in accordance with ITU T Rec G 723 1 to allow the transmission of Group III facsimile and high quality compressed voice signals while requiring for each channel a bandwidth of only 4 8 6 4 7 2 9 6 or 12 8 kbps on the Kilomux main link For more information refer to the KVF 5 Installation and Operation Manual The following versions are available KVF 5 T1 M KVF 5 master module with balanced T1 sub link interface for conn
143. ects one of the power circuits trips the other module continues to receive power e If 48 VDC battery backup is available install one DC powered KPS 3 module and one AC powered module Make sure to select power supply modules with comparable ratings e g KPS 6 and KPS 7 KML Module Redundancy The KML module serves as the connecting link between the Kilomux 2100 unit and the communication channel For extra protection a second KML module may be installed in parallel to the primary KML module The two KML modules are then connected through two independent links which may even follow different paths to two similar modules located at the remote end of the link In the switched backup mode the two links can be operated at different data rates Redundant Standby Link Modem KILOMUX 2100 KILOMUX 2100 Figure 1 10 Redundant Kilomux 2100 System Note In this mode MLA and MLB rates should be the same e Installing two different KML modules is only available when using a KML 1 2 3 or 4 for both modules Each KML module is connected to an independent internal bus The internal buses reach each I O module installed in the enclosure therefore each module has equal access to each KML module Application Considerations 1 21 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual When redundancy is enabled the redundant KML module is automatically programmed exactly like the primary but
144. ed by the Kilomux prompt The day of the week is automatically stamped Purpose Define the daily schedule of utilization of the switched backup mode Separate schedules can be defined for each day of week Each 24 hour schedule includes up to four independent periods defined by the starting and ending time hour and minutes For each period you can enable or disable the use of a switched backup link Format DEF AGENDA day where day stands for SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI or SAT Use 1 To select the schedule for a specific day e g for Sunday type DEF AGENDA SUN lt ENTER gt Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description The first part of the daily schedule parameters data form is displayed A typical data form is shown below Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 END START END START END START END hh mm hh mm hh mm 24 00 where hh hour 00 through 23 mm minutes 00 through 59 2 Change parameters as follows Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by pressing the space bar Change the selected field by pressing F or B to scroll among the available selections When the desired selection is displayed press the space bar to move to the next field 3 After the desired parameter values are selected press ENTER to end Kilomux will display the time and date fields followe
145. el of a corporate data transmission system e g the main link of one of the Kilomux units is connected to a data channel of a Megaplex 2100 and one or more of the Kilomux channels are connected to a data network which provides accurate timing e g to a DDS link an ISDN line or another data network In this case the network timing can be distributed through Kilomux to the other parts of the system Figure 1 30 shows a typical connection to a DDS network through a KHS 1 module for connection to an ISDN line replace the KHS 1 module with a KHS U module In the DCE mode no buffers are used in the main link data paths because Kilomux determines the receive and transmit rates DCE Timing External Timing Es gt o gt RCV Clock KILOMUX MEGAPLEX Channel Channel in DTE2 in DTE2 Timing Timing Mode 3 Figure 1 30 Typical DCE KML 1 4 Timing Application 1 42 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information Internal Timing KML 5 KML 6 KML 7 KML 8 KML 11 and KML F Modules When the internal timing mode is used with a KML 5 KML 6 KML 7 KML 8 KML 11 or KML F module the source for the internal timing signals is a crystal oscillator located in the main link module The internal timing mode can be used in point to point links and in independent networks In any link or network only one Kilomux unit may operate with inter
146. en the KML module and the local modem Usually this loop is activated after the remote main link loop fails but both the local and the remote Kilomux units successfully pass the local main link loops If this loop is successful the next loop to be performed is the remote main link modem loop loop 2 Therefore as a rule perform loop 3 only after successfully performing a local main link loop on the local Kilomux unit Main Link Loop 3 Signal Path When loop 3 is activated on a modem that supports this function the Kilomux transmit signal is returned by the local modem on the receive path The loop signal path is shown in Figure 5 3 User or Test Equipment Local Modem 1 0 Modules Local KILOMUX User or Test Equipment I O Modules Remote KILOMUX Figure 5 3 Main Link Modem Loop 3 Signal Path Main Link Loop 3 Normal Indications and Fault Location e The TEST indicator of the Kilomux lights e The TXD and RXD indicators of the local Kilomux must light and the LOCAL SYNC LOSS indicator must be off If not the connections to the modem or the modem itself are defective Remote Main Link Modem Loop Loop 2 The main purpose of the main link modem loop 2 is to check the link between the two modems that serve the main link As a rule perform loop 2 only after successfully performing loop 3 on the local Kilomux unit Main Link Modem Loop 2 Signal Path When loop 2 is activated on a
147. ent part or b request return of equipment to its plant for repair or c perform necessary repair at the equipment location In the event that RAD requests the return of equipment each party shall pay one way shipping costs RAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the event that the equipment has been subjected to misuse neglect accident or improper installation or if repairs or modifications were made by persons other than RAD s own authorized service personnel unless such repairs by others were made with the written consent of RAD The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied There are no warranties which extend beyond the face hereof including but not limited to warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and in no event shall RAD be liable for consequential damages RAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages including but not limited to lost profits from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the manufacture sale handling repair maintenance or use of the Kilomux 2100 2104 and in no event shall RAD s liability exceed the purchase price of the Kilomux 2100 2104 DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all warranties which it makes relating to Kilomux 2100 2104 and for ensuring that replacements and other adjustments required in connection with the said warranties are satisfa
148. eparated by periods GATEWAY Determines the gateway IP address Four groups of digits ranging from O MAIN LINK IP through 255 separated by periods ADDRESS SUBNET MASK Determines the mask Four groups of digits ranging from O through 255 separated by periods DESTINATION Choose a remote main link to work Four groups of digits ranging from 0 MAIN LINK IP with through 255 separated by periods ADDRESS IP TYPE OF Set the IP TOS field in the IP frames O through FF SERVICE transmitted by the device IP MUX The bundle identifier Identical on 1 through 255 BUNDLE ID both sides AUTO_NEG Enable the auto negotiation mode YES Work with maximum capability rate NO The rate is determined by the user LAN_RATE Sets the port mode half full duplex 10 Mbps FD and rate 10 100 Mbps 10 Mbps HD 100 Mbps FD 100 Mbps HD N A When auto negotiation is set to YES MAX_CAP Determine the maximum capabilities 10 Mbps FD of the port for the auto negotiation 10 Mbps HD process the value can be lower than the actual capability 100 Mbps FD 100 Mbps HD N A When auto negotiation is set to NO TDM BYTES The number of TDM bytes to be sent 48 96 144 192 240 288 336 or 384 in an Ethernet frame bytes JITTER BUFFER The size of an elastic buffer per 100 through 1000 msec in increments of bundle whose size is configurable 100 msec General E 7 Appendix E Configuration Parameters Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Supervisory Port
149. equirements and Prerequisites Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation Channel Connection Considerations Special cables can be ordered to connect the Kilomux main link and I O modules either directly to the user equipment or via a main distribution frame T1 and E1 interfaces of Kilomux modules must not be connected directly to the telecommunication network The connections must be made through a network termination unit that provides separation between the interface conductors and the telecommunication network conductors in accordance with the applicable local regulations When a Kilomux module with T1 interface connects to a system that requires compliance with DSX 1 requirements the distance between the module and the DSX 1 unit assuming 22 AWG pairs should not exceed 200 m 655 ft Front and Rear Panel Clearance Allow at least 90 cm 36 inches of frontal clearance for operator access Allow the same clearance at the rear of the unit for interface cable connections and module replacement Ambient Requirements Caution The range of ambient operating temperatures of Kilomux is 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C at a relative humidity of up to 90 non condensing Kilomux is cooled by free air convection Its cooling vents are located in the top and bottom covers To prevent overheating do not obstruct the Kilomux cooling vents and make sure enough free space is available below and above Kilomu
150. es esin e n a a 3 1 General rnin a a E N E iguana 3 1 3 3 Setting Configuration Para Meters sesadenasraidna gilsabuscalsiyauanasenbieatnhisestainanuatomrsas ainatinlinbeans 3 2 General Configuration Proce a aire sssisinssissisussi uieii innin ei SRE NE aE 3 2 Config ring the System Parameters a ccstincigaiicnidacadadiasgansaticed teanldoisapuadedalanidbigas dea tuanadvnani 3 2 Configuring the Main Link Parameters taccisaciacnascntatdinssusndadavadtoandudsscasagananiidasediendiddoatduis sass 3 4 Configuring the Channel Parameters ississoxsass gone csadanansiwanudyshonianss Genidiehd ants thoanadghbontanasiunsl 3 5 Configuring the SP Peeve tS as iste paniei oeaan NENT ANARE EARE 3 5 ii Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents Chapter 4 Operation 4V SAPTWEM ell aisncausaegineaseasain pneu ats eae ean iaa ask adaasaav AEE EEE AEAEE EEE ease 4 1 4 2 Kilomux Supervision Language ai tins cesesiites Accu ein rontinrn Homtandiameiemnrnniateataes 4 1 Command Langage SyntaX sassen ninna iiaae ia aea aaia asana i 4 1 Command QPEONS srersisi siriane evant R EE E EEE EE 4 2 Command PrOLOCO s ces veett tis e e a ET sit E A snes oegutdesiyeay 4 3 INGEX Of Commands insinte ia E aea E te ann sativa diane AERAR E E RA 4 4 4 3 Fr nt PTV APIS sacha neieiet Dane dea ade oE EAE EE EE NEEE EEEa 4 7 4A Operating ISERURCHIONNS resres 4 9 Supervision Terminal syssssise rrr ena e ENEE EEEE E ET EER 4 9 Chapter 5 Diagnostics Te AN
151. es per multiframe respectively in accordance with user s selection The KML 8 module also supports the CRC 4 option including support for the E bit as specified in ITU T Rec G 704 thereby allowing the carrier to monitor the link to Kilomux CRC 4 use is user programmable The KML 8 module uses the HDB 3 line code Jitter performance complies with the requirements of ITU T Rec G 823 The module has two line interfaces a 120Q balanced interface and a 75Q unbalanced interface ISDN S Interface Module KML 10 S The ISDN basic rate access S interface complies with ITU T Rec 1 430 The interface operates at a nominal rate of 192 kbps and carries two B data channels nominal rate 64 kbps one D signaling channel nominal rate 16 kbps and additional framing and maintenance overhead data The line coding is 2B1Q The line impedance is 100Q The user can select whether to connect or not the internal line termination of the module ISDN U Interface Module KML 10 U The ISDN basic rate access U interface complies with the ANSI T1 601 and ETSI DTR TM3002 standards The line data rate is 160 kbps and the line coding is 2B1Q The utilization of the B and D channels is similar to that described above for the KML 10 S module The line impedance is 135Q IP Link Interface Module KML 11 The KML 11 main link module connects the KM 2100 directly to a LAN or an Ethernet based backbone The KML 11 takes the TDM bit stream delivered
152. essnsseeeeecececsesnestsaeeeeeeeesenestsasaeeeeees 1 9 1 8 Kilomux 2104 Enclosure Front Panel sisssssinewiesissesnesanteancnsssnonsanatnadanaysionganashininannswasdnnneanenanies 1 10 1 9 Basie Kilomux Systeri SUCU sessisseieiierestenrsied nieni iait reae E EEEE ESEE EEE AREA AREE 1 16 1 10 Redundant Kilomux 2100 System 5 cesacesasavnss sondnsanpeveseoisacanavnnereadsweassnusaswcisnrvaad tae cenimueette 1 21 1 11 Dual Link High Capacity Point to Point Application ie icscnansssveesennsedionssdeesesanevanenosnsousnnns 1 22 1 12 Dual Link System Independent Link Application tizsisisscsnsasnovssisareeaseanesnnssnnarssvannieaiennnstasichaiys 1 23 1 13 Basic Bypassing Configuration lt asctisdasiosvins theca dasoetadsiwasisinaseacuaasbolatnainetsaasbbonsiaabonesaataelanaaanees 1 24 1 14 Bypassing Parameters secsi ni vacmaabeneddaniavacamaalactian teem iaeaaanneaiawmmmenteaentiis 1 25 1 15 Typical Bypassing Application sascesniensicarasiitnesinauuteannsedsnraanciunasancosdndeanonssecccaimendesheeiseies 1 26 1 16 Typical KDI Bypassing and Multidrop Application s sssssessssssesesrsrsrssrsrrsesstrsrrerssrerrerrsrne 1 27 1 17 Typical Switched Backup C Ori SUrAaMOn ccsscsisacciaincadncistsaatiinsaitcvaandrtnsxpistdevainactattincanaunedvsyenade 1 29 1 18 Typical ISDN Switched Backup Application ciasssssesssisacsssssnseenaarnenisonasonasnntaryaanasskdoanssanssionsons 1 30 1 19 Single Switch ModE ssssisisrsrisssassssisistesisassiiioteeisina seniii airesin
153. eter consider the Kilomux link s total bandwidth Since the bandwidth is shared make sure that the speed chosen for the download parameter is high enough to allow the link to work efficiently but that enough bandwidth is left for data transfer NO Disables management channel 0 8 to 19 2 kbps Management channel is enabled and uses the specified bandwidth EXT Management channel is enabled and uses either the dedicated time slot or time slot O KML 8 or FDL KML 7 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Designation ML_MODE Appendix F Command Set Description Table F 5 System Parameters Cont Function When Kilomux 2100 includes two KML modules you must define how to use the modules When using a KDI module always select the DUAL LINK mode Values SINGLE Single main link operation REDUNDANCY The two KML modules operate as a redundant pair DUAL LINK The two KML modules provide two independent links PRIORITY BUMPING The two KML modules provide two parallel links with priority bumping SWITCHED BACKUP One of the KML modules provides the main link and the other module provides the switched backup link SWITCH Single main link over ISDN line DUAL SWITCH Two main links over ISDN line SINGLE and SWITCH Single main link operation and single main link over ISDN line ML_RECOVERY When using the redundancy or priority bumping mode selects the method use
154. ets in two ways to orient the unit in accordance with your requirements either with the Kilomux 2100 front panel toward the front of the rack or the module panels toward the front Install Brackets Here if you want Access to Module Panels from the Front of the Rack Install Brackets Here if you want the Front Panel toward the Front of the Rack Figure 2 1 Attachment of Brackets After attaching the brackets fasten the enclosure to the rack by four screws two on each side After fastening the enclosure install the required modules and set the jumpers and switches Refer below to KPS Module 2 12 Installation and Setup of Kilomux Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation Kilomux 2104 KPS Module Note The Kilomux 2104 is intended for 19 rack installation Before installing the enclosure check whether the required I O modules are in place in accordance with the installation plan The enclosure is fastened to the rack by four screws two on each side Do not connect power to the enclosure before it is installed in the designated position Setting the Internal Jumpers The KPS modules include one internal jumper designated FG SG The location of the jumper is shown in Figure 2 2 This jumper controls the connection between the internal signal ground and the frame enclosure ground The module is delivered with the jumper set to YES Set the jumper to NO if you need the
155. fault in the link or in the link transmission equipment or a failure in the active main link module 59 EXECIVE ERR RATIO State The error rate detected on the frame SLOT i synchronization bits is high as defined by ITU T Rec G 732 and may indicate hardware problems or defective connections 60 CRC 4 ERROR SLOTi Event The main link module reports the detection of a CRC error 61 SFIFO B R G FAIL State The baud rate generator of the specified module SLOT i failed Replace the module Alarm Messages Appendix B Alarms B 6 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table B 1 Alarm Messages Cont Code Message Terminal Alarm Description Type 62 SFIFO SLIP SLOT i Event The KML 7 module installed in the specified slot reports that a slip occurred in the SFIFO 63 INTERNAL CLOCKIN State The internal oscillator has been selected as a timing USE SLOT i reference sources as a result of simultaneous failure of both the master and fallback clock sources 64 DP CYCLE DIAL FAILED Event The dial out cycle failed and the redial attempts stopped until a new alarm reported 65 DP PRIMARY CALL Event The call setup attempts to the primary dial out FAILED directory number failed 66 DP ALTERNATE CALL Event The call setup attempts to the alternate dial out FAILED directory number failed 67 FRAMER CARD FAILED State The master KVF 5 module failed 68 MGMT PORT IS State Management port is looped and cannot LOOPED ML i communicate
156. fer to Operating Instructions in the Operation chapter 1 Start a session for Kilomux refer to Starting a Session Single Kilomux and Starting a Session Multiple Kilomux in the Operation chapter Type the desired commands after the working prompt and press Enter to execute the command Refer to the Command Set Description appendix for a list of commands available End the control session by typing EXIT 2 Controlling Kilomux from a Supervisory Port Contents Chapter 1 General Information 1A Functional QOS COI OTIC axiatesat trastscicewsbusanacnevastoatiali oon dnuauseanqussinaasebavaninateseuiosemantmnacidayrnteas 1 1 Main System Features sccscssiv secssseasessstessecsstiabeis e a E ia Ea aa s 1 1 System Supervision and Configuration s sessessssisssessissisrstseisisssstrissnrentnstsrstnnrennsenrenentnnt 1 4 Diagnostic Capabilities s ssssssassstecadsetisvadeesedeestiniacesenausgusnoguued gontdeca zuegueaesooudeds ANANS 1 6 12 Physical DCS GnIOUON siccncasanaysnanernteo rane ican Mua Em seINiireNae 1 6 Kilomux 2100 General Description eee e eee ceeceeee cee testes ceaecaeeeeesaecaaeseetesseaetaeteeeeaeeags 1 6 Kil mux 2100 Rear Panel nisar niensis nyai R E AA i 1 7 KilOMAUX 2 1 00 Front Panel sssri esiosan p niea ERN a EEE AAA EEE EE EEEE 1 8 Kilomux 2104 General Descriptio Msisi tesisa aaae iia AA A Ea a 1 8 Kilomwe 2104 Rear Panel se scetoss acess ie E Gosh AEA A A A A 1 9 Kilom x 21 04 Front Panelia
157. first digit of the code to be changed by pressing ENTER then enter the appropriate hexadecimal digit 3 Repeat the procedure until all the necessary digits are changed Purpose Change the active KML module in a redundant system Format FLIP ML Use e To change the active KML module type FLIP ML lt ENTER gt Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description HELP Purpose Display an index of the supervisory port commands and the options available for each command Format H 1 2 3 4 Use e To display all the pages of the HELP system type H lt ENTER gt e To display a specific page of the HELP system e g page 1 type H 1 lt ENTER gt INIT DB Purpose Load the default parameters values instead of the user configuration in the Kilomux database see Table F 6 This command is available only on a master Kilomux Format NIT DB Use 1 To load the default parameters type NIT DB lt ENTER gt 2 Kilomux displays the time and date fields followed by the Kilomux prompt Commands F 51 Appendix F Command Set Description INIT F Function Clear Screen Cursor Home Cursor Right F 52 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table F 6 Kilomux Default Configuration Used with Supervision Terminal Parameter Type System Link Channel SP Superv
158. g L SHM 0000o Modem with Modem with External Timing Loopback Timing KILOMUX KILOMUX Channel in DTE2 Timing Figure 1 29 Typical External DCE Timing Application Application Considerations 1 41 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual DTE iD e Internal timing The source for the internal timing signals is a crystal oscillator located in the KML module The timing accuracy of this oscillator is 50 parts per million ppm The internal timing mode can be used in point to point links and in independent networks In any system only one unit may operate with internal timing All the other units must use DTE timing to ensure synchronization In this way the unit that operates with internal timing is the source of the master clock and determines timing of the entire network In the external DCE mode buffers are used in the main link receive path but not in the transmit path Buffer size is selectable 8 or 256 bits DCE Timing KML 1 KML 2 KML 3 and KML 4 Modules With DCE timing Kilomux provides both the transmit and receive clock signals to the equipment to which it is connected e g a Megaplex 2100 The timing reference source of the transmit timing signals can be selected as for the external DCE mode The connected equipment must then use the DTE timing mode The DCE timing mode is useful when the Kilomux main link is connected to a chann
159. g is invoked Local loopback Remote loopback Loop 2 and loop 3 on main link modem as defined in ITU T Rec V 54 Local loopback Remote loopback Pseudo random sequence transmission test 511 bit pattern BERT bit error rate test using 511 bit pattern pseudo random sequence ITU T Rec V 54 loop 2 and loop 3 by interface connector pins Tone injection for voice modules LCD alarm buffer stores one alarm of each type Supervision terminal alarm buffer stores the last 100 alarms Each alarm time and date stamped RJ 12 connector For pinout refer to Appendix A 9 pin female connector Direct connection to dial up modem For pinout refer to Appendix A AA Warning Chapter 2 Installation 2 1 Introduction This chapter provides installation and setup instructions for the Kilomux enclosure and for the modules that are part of the basic system configuration The information in this chapter includes e The site requirements and prerequisites necessary for installing Kilomux e The equipment needed to run Kilomux e The contents of the Kilomux package e The installation and setup of the Kilomux system e The various Kilomux interfaces and connection instructions e The initial setup and configuration of the Kilomux system After installing the Kilomux system it is necessary to configure the system in accordance with the specific user s requirements Refer to the Configuring Kilomux chapter After the preliminary conf
160. guration type DEF ML B lt ENTER gt The corresponding main link parameters data form is displayed 4 Make the desired changes and after the desired parameter values are selected press ENTER to end Kilomux displays the time and date fields followed by the Kilomux prompt Purpose Define the parameters used to control the setup of a backup dial up connection when Kilomux operates in the switched backup mode The switched backup mode is selected by means of the DEF SYS command Before using this command define the configuration parameters of the two main link modules using the DEF ML command Format DEF ML CALL A B Use 1 Type the command corresponding to the KML 10 module installed in slot 3 or slot 4 DEF ML CALL lt ENTER gt The main link call parameters data form is displayed The data form depends on the type of main link module installed in slot 3 or slot 4 the KML 10 ISDN interface module or other type of module Data Form for KML 10 Modules Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description A typical US ISDN standard form is shown below IN NUM MOD CALL TIME OUT SW_BACKUP_DB NONI 45sec ONLINE ABSTRACT TERMINAL 1 UB ADDRES ECTORY i Dee EI NUMBI ABSTRACT TI SUB ADDRES DIRECTORY S T PTD agi EI NUMBI FIRST BACKUP SUB ADDRESS FIRST BACKUP DIRECT
161. hazards regarding product operation or maintenance to operator or service personnel Danger of electric shock Avoid any contact with the marked surface while the product is energized or connected to outdoor telecommunication lines Protective earth the marked lug or terminal should be connected to the building protective earth bus Some products may be equipped with a laser diode In such cases a label with the laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near the optical transmitter The laser warning symbol may be also attached Please observe the following precautions e Before turning on the equipment make sure that the fiber optic cable is intact and is connected to the transmitter e Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current e Do not use broken or unterminated fiber optic cables connectors or look straight at the laser beam e The use of optical devices with the equipment will increase eye hazard e Use of controls adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure ATTENTION The laser beam may be invisible Always observe standard safety precautions during installation operation and maintenance of this product Only qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment maintenance or repairs to this product No installation adjustment maintenance or repairs should be performed by either the operator or the user
162. he DSR line is continuously ON ON or if it tracks the DTR line DTR Default ON E 8 General Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix E Configuration Parameters Table E 3 Supervisory Port Parameters Cont Designation POP_ALARM Function Values NO Controls the automatic display of PWD LOG_OFF AUXILIARY_ DEVICE alarms on the terminal Controls password protection Selects idle disconnect time Selects auxiliary device YES Default NO NO YES Default NO NO 10 MIN 10 Default NO NMS SLIP AGENT SLIP TERMINAL Default TERMINAL General E 9 Appendix E Configuration Parameters Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual E 10 General Note Appendix F Command Set Description F 1 General This appendix describes the Kilomux commands The commands are listed in alphabetical order The description includes command format use and options The following notation conventions are used Epi square brackets enclose an optional entry parameter braces enclose a list of entries parameters from which one must be selected lt ENTER gt indicates the pressing of the ENTER key lt SP gt indicates the pressing of the space bar i indicates an I O slot number OP indicates the options slot j indicates the channel number within the selected I O slot The ML B option is for Kilomux 2100 only Some commands may include fields not be relevant for Kilomux
163. he KCL 2 module e MNG 9 pin Dial Port e ETHERNET UTP Ethernet interface e ETHERNET BNC Ethernet interface Supervisory Port Connector The 9 pin D type female type connector located on the KCL 2 module the Supervisory Port connector can be used to manage the Kilomux unit by means of an ASCII terminal a RADview network management station or TELNET over SLIP The communication parameters of this port can be selected in accordance with system requirements e Data rate 9 6 for use with ASCII terminal or SLIP connection 19 2 38 4 or 57 6 kbps for use with SLIP connection only e Word format One start bit Seven or eight data bits Even odd or no parity One stop bit e Interface type DCE or DTE user selectable Ethernet Port The KCL 2 module can be ordered with either a UTP or a BNC Ethernet connector Dial Port Connector The KCL module can be ordered with an additional 9 pin D type female type connector as the MNG port This port is intended for connection to a Hayes or Hayes compatible dial up modem The reporting method can be programmed by the user in accordance with the following options e Always send a report whenever a new alarm or event condition is detected e Reporting disabled no dial out function When it is necessary to report an alarm condition Kilomux initiates the call set up After the destination answers Kilomux sends the complete contents of the alarm buffer Following
164. he backup link when the switched backup mode is used ONLINE The currently active on line database The channels to be carried by the backup link must be assigned HIGH priority using the DEF CON command ALTERNATE When switching to the backup link Kilomux 2100 automatically switches to the alternate database For this mode the alternate database is dedicated only to backup configuration and must not be used for other purposes refer to DEF DB FLIP command The channels to be carried by the backup link must be assigned HIGH priority in the background database using the DEF CON command Also the DEF SYS DEF ML B and DEF ML commands need to be configured in the background database After the main link returns to normal operation and the backup link is disconnected Kilomux 2100 automatically returns to the main database SUB ADDRESS Enter the sub address of the local ISDN directory number DIRECTORY NUMBER Enter the ISDN directory number of the line connected to the KML 10 module up to 20 digits SPID The Service Profile ID This field is only relevant for US standard ATT 5ESS AT amp T 4ESS and 5ESS switches NT DMS 100 Northern Telecom DMS 100 switch NI Bellcore National ISDN1 The ISDN service provider provides the SPID number when you subscribe The SPID number represents the type of service provided The SPID number is used by the TE interface registration before any calls are established TEI NUMB
165. he desired command and press ENTER For example with node address 234 type NODE lt SP gt 234 lt SP gt command and press ENTER If the addressed Kilomux does not use password protection it will immediately execute the command If the addressed Kilomux is password protected you will see the prompt PASSWORD gt 3 Type the node address again and then type the password For example for node address 234 type NODE lt SP gt 234 lt SP gt password and press ENTER If the password is correct Kilomux will execute the command Otherwise you will see PASSWORD gt Control Session 1 During the control session type the desired commands at the terminal keyboard You must see the Kilomux echo character by character When you see the correct and complete command in the echo line press ENTER to execute the command Kilomux will process the command and display the appropriate response At the end of the command execution Kilomux displays the current time and date and then provides a new prompt on the next line If you changed your mind and want to abort the command press BREAK or CTRL C You will receive the prompt again so you can enter another command If your command is not correct Kilomux will not execute it but will echo the command and display BAD COMMAND OR PARAMETER TYPE H FOR HELP Type the correct command Operating Instructions 4 11 Chapter 4 Operation Ki
166. he main link timing modes are DTE DCE adaptive and external DCE In the DCE and external DCE modes the timing reference source can be selected by the user e Internal oscillator e External timing locked to one of the data channels e The other main link module provided a KDI module is installed In addition to the main timing source a fallback source can be selected When the timing mode is DTE or external DCE buffers are inserted in the main link signal paths to absorb the expected jitter and timing instabilities Normal buffer size is 8 bits for operation over satellite links The receive buffer size can be increased to 256 bits The timing modes available for the data channels are programmable thereby permitting each channel to be configured as DCE supplies receive and transmit clocks to the user s equipment DTE1 supplies the receive clock and accept a transmit clock or DTE2 accepts receive and transmit clocks from the user s equipment with buffered retiming of the received data Connection to the national network and to common carrier data lines is also supported with the external clock selectable as the source for system timing For modules with ISDN T1 E1 and fiber optic interfaces a loopback timing mode is available This mode enables locking the Kilomux timing to the accurate timing provided by the network to which the interface is connected Functional Description 1 3 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux
167. he table also lists the parameter values included in the Kilomux default configuration Refer to the Operation chapter for information on additional system parameters Table E 1 System Parameters Function Values CLK_MASTER Selects the master timing reference for the main link transmit path This parameter is displayed only when the main link interface is DCE or external DCE E DCE which are available only with the KML 1 KML 2 KML 3 KML 4 and KML F modules using the TE mode It is not displayed when a KML 5 KML 6 KML 7 KML 8 KML 10 module is installed INT Internal oscillator i j Locked to the external clock received from the indicated data channel This selection is available only when the Kilomux enclosure includes I O modules with synchronous data channels which support the DTE2 timing mode e g KLS 1 KHS 1 modules with ISDN interface e g KHS U or KVF 4 SO or modules with T1 or E1 interface e g KVF 5 Only channels of such modules are available for selection on the LCD Note that the selected channel must actually use a timing mode which supports the connection of an external timing reference e g the DTE2 mode for synchronous data channels the TE or LT mode for ISDN channels or loopback timing for T1 or E1 interfaces A is the Kilomux I O slot number 1 through 12 B is the module channel number 1 or 2 Default INT General E 1 Appendix E Configuration Parameters E 2 Kil
168. hed within a predetermined interval the attempt is aborted When the primary link returns to normal operation the dial up modem hangs up and thus disconnects the backup link Switched Backup Using ISDN Lines This mode is supported when a KML 10 module is connected to a switched ISDN line In this case higher data rates are available for the backup link 64 kbps use of one B channel and 128 kbps use of both B channels Figure 1 18 shows a typical switched backup application RAD offers a proprietary algorithm which enables using both B channels to obtain the 128 kbps rate even when differential delay is present However the use of a proprietary algorithm means that KML 10 modules must be installed at both ends of the link This proprietary algorithm based on the BONDING mode 1 protocol defined by the Bandwidth on Demand Inter operability Group BONDING enables the KML 10 modules to combine the bandwidth of the two B channels while correcting for differential delays of up to 512 ms between the two channels This delay is sufficient to enable using links which pass through up to two satellite hops Application Considerations 1 29 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Active Link I O Modules PQSRG HPS Sass i i Switched Backup Link KILOMUX 2100 Switched Data Network FETE EEEF EELEE Figure 1 18 Typical ISDN Switched Backup Application Ssa 7
169. icable to the current command the field shows N A and scrolling is not possible N A will appear in fields of a DEF command that specify parameters not used in the selected operating mode Ending a Session If an idle disconnect time out is specified Kilomux will automatically disconnect the ongoing session if no command is received from the terminal for the specified time out interval The EXIT command disconnects the supervisory port and transfers the control to the front panel LCD and push button After ending a session by the EXIT command you can press any alphanumeric or editing key to start a new session It is recommended to press the ENTER key Index of Commands 4 4 Table 4 2 lists the Kilomux commands in alphabetical order Note that some commands have both a long hand and an abbreviated format Table 4 2 Kilomux Command Set Index Command Purpose Options BYE Return control to the Kilomux front panel at the end of a TELNET session CLR ALM Clear alarms stored in the Kilomux alarm buffer A CLR LOOP Clear user initiated loops or tests CLR LP CLR LAN STATISTICS Clear Tx and Rx frame counter CLR LAN STAT Kilomux Supervision Language Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Command CLR MONITOR CLR M CONNECT SWITCH DATE DEF AGENDA DEF AGENT DEF ALM DEBOUNCE DEF CALL DEF CH DEF CON DEF DB FLIP DEF DP DEF FRAME DEF MANAGER LIST DEF ML DEF ML CALL DEF NAME DEF N
170. icators Table 4 3 lists the functions of the indicators located on the Kilomux front panel The index numbers in Table 4 5 correspond to the item numbers in Figure 4 1 and Figure 4 2 on une ownune gt o R rst RX RTSMLEAD ae Loca Los O DCD E LEAD es renoTE los VOICE DATA CHANNEL A POWER SUPPLY A MAIN LINK KILOMUX 2100 See Insert on Next Page Figure 4 1 Kilomux 2100 Front Panel KILOMUX 2104 Figure 4 2 Kilomux 2104 Front Panel Front Panel Indicators 4 7 Chapter 4 Operation Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table 4 3 Kilomux Controls Connectors and Indicators No Control or Indicator Function 1 TEST indicator Indicates that a test or test loop is being performed on one of the local Kilomux modules for main link modules KML 1 through KML 4 this indicator will also light when a V 54 loop is activated on the modem serving the main link When downloading is activated also lights when a test is activated by the remote Kilomux on one of the local Kilomux modules 2 ALARM indicator Indicates that a fault has been detected in one of the Kilomux modules 3 ONLINE indicator Lights steadily when the module is operating properly and is active For KML modules flashes when the module is operating properly but is in standby the other module of the same type is active Off when the corresponding modu
171. iew management is disabled you must turn off AUTOBAUD Handshaking Protocol with Dial up Modem The handshaking procedure between Kilomux and a dial up modem uses the control signals in the optional MNG connector and is essentially similar to the handshaking with a terminal The difference is that the directions of the control signals are reversed relative to their direction in the SP CONTROL DCE connector when the SP interface is set to DCE The control lines and the direction of the control signals in the MNG connector is detailed in the following chart Table 2 4 MNG Connector Control Lines SP CONTROL DTE Control Line Direction CTS In DCD In DSR Out DTR In RI In RTS Out 2 4 Package Contents The Kilomux package includes the following items e Kilomux e Power cable e WAN connectors e Optional I O modules e Kilomux Installation and Operation Manual Package Contents 2 11 Chapter 2 Installation Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 2 5 Installation and Setup of Kilomux To install a Kilomux 2100 refer below to Kilomux 2100 To install a Kilomux 2104 refer below to Kilomux 2104 Kilomux 2100 Kilomux 2100 is intended for installation on shelves and racks Do not connect power to the enclosure before it is installed in the designated position For rack installation it is necessary to install two brackets to the sides of the unit Figure 2 1 As illustrated below you may install the brack
172. iguration the system can be managed by means of the RADview PC network management station offered by RAD Refer to the User s Reference Manual of the network management station for operating instructions In case a problem is encountered refer to the Diagnostics chapter for test and diagnostics instructions No internal settings adjustment maintenance and repairs may be performed by either the operator or the user such activities may be performed only by a skilled technician who is aware of the hazards involved Always observe standard safety precautions during installation operation and maintenance of this product Introduction 2 1 Chapter 2 Installation Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 2 2 Site Requirements and Prerequisites Input Power Requirements Grounding A Warning For AC operation the Kilomux unit should be installed within 1 5m 5 feet of an easily accessible grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing the mains voltage of the ordered KPS module KPS 4 and KPS 6 modules of Kilomux 2100 and the AC power supply of Kilomux 2104 can operate on AC supply voltages in the range of 100 to 240 VAC at input frequencies of 47 through 440 Hz The maximum input current varies with the input voltage For DC operation the Kilomux unit should be connected to a 48 VDC or 24 VDC source in accordance with the nominal voltage of the ordered KPS module through a circuit breaker The DC source must comply with
173. ill indicate which time slot will carry the CCS information ABCD If the selected signaling mode is CAS any bits selected except CCS then the default A B C D to be transmitted to the PBX is displayed in this field POLARITY Polarity of a bit Normal Inverted for master module only For the slave modules displays N A EXIST Indicates whether the module includes a sub interface Purpose Display the configuration parameters of the KVF 6 modules in the Kilomux Format DSP KVF6 Commands Use Type DSP KVF6 lt ENTER gt Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description Typical data for E1 T1 cards is shown as follows CARD TYPE FRAME SIG MODE KVF6 T1 24 SF D4 CAS B N A N A KVF6 E1 16 G 732S CAS B A B KVF6 T1 12 ESF CAS OT AO 1 KVF6 E1 31 G 732N CAS A N A N A N A The fields appearing on the data form are as follows e SLOT Displays the slot in which each module of KVF 6 is installed e CARD_TYPE Displays the module type installed in the corresponding slot KVF 6 T1 24 KVF 6 T1 12 KVF 6 E1 31 or KVF 6 E1 16 e FRAME Displays the framing format of the KVF 6 module For KVF 6 E1 31 or KVF 6 E1 16 displays G 732N or G 732S For KVF 6 T1 24 or KVF 6 T1 12 displays SF D4 or ESF e SIG MODE Displays the signaling operation mode of the KVF 6 module CAS or CCS e TS Displays the time slot number that carries the
174. ine a list of the communities which are authorized to communicate with it and the access rights associated with each community this is the entity s SNMP community name table For example the SNMP community name table of the SNMP agent of the Kilomux can include three community names In accordance with the SNMP protocol the SNMP community of the originating entity is sent in each message When an SNMP message is received by the addressed entity first it checks the originator s community if the community name of the message originator differs from the community name specified for that type of message in the agent the message it discarded SNMP agents of managed entities report this event by means of an authentication failure trap SNMP Environment C 3 Appendix C SNMP Management Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual General Kilomux Communities The SNMP agent of the Kilomux is programmed to recognize the following community types e Read SNMP community that has read only authorization i e the SNMP agent will accept only getRequest and getNextRequest commands from management stations using that community e Write SNMP community that has read write authorization i e the SNMP agent will also accept setRequest commands from management stations using that community e Trap SNMP community which the SNMP agent will send within trap messages C 3 IP Environment The SNMP agent of the Kilomux can commu
175. ing module continues to supply the power alone and there is no redundancy Switch over is automatic and does not disturb normal operation The Kilomux 2104 enclosure includes one power supply The available types are e AC 30W power supply for 100 to 240 VAC mains e 48 40W power supply for 48 VDC mains e 24 40W power supply for 24 VDC mains In addition to power supply modules the Kilomux 2100 enclosure supports one KM Ringer module for providing line feed and ring voltages for voice channels and phantom feed for ISDN lines This module is available in AC 115 to 230 VAC and DC 24 VDC or 48 VDC input voltage versions The KM Ringer can be installed as a plug in module for Kilomux 2100 or located on shelves or desktops Physical Description 1 11 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Option Modules Kilomux 2100 Only 1 0 Modules Note The Kilomux 2100 enclosure can accept two types of options module KAI Kilomux 2100 only Alarm indication module for installation in the options position or in any I O slot The KAI includes indicators similar to those located on the Kilomux 2100 front panel These indicators repeat all the relevant Kilomux 2100 front panel indications on the rear panel and thus complement the indicators available on the rear panels of the other modules Maintenance activities are thus expedited as all the Kilomux 2100 indications become readily available on
176. ink bandwidth allocated to the management channel in kbps e TOTAL USAGE The total main link bandwidth currently allocated in kbps e TOTAL FREE The total main link bandwidth in kbps that is not yet allocated and is free Display Format MANUAL Frame Bit Allocation A typical DSP ST FRAME display when the frame bit allocation mode selected by means of the DEF SYS command is manual is shown below 160 BIT 128 0 KBPS 0 800 KBPS 16 BYPASS SIZE 20 CH2 START CH2 SIZE CNTRL START CNTRL SIZE LAST BIT SLOT 01 000 06 014 F 42 Commands 012 012 000 000 000 000 012 000 001 000 012 025 The display shows the number of bits in the frame and the bit weight main link bandwidth allocation unit followed by the bypass information and bandwidth utilization of each slot e BYPASS_START The number of the first bit in the block of bits being bypassed e BYPASS SIZE The total number of bits being bypassed e CH_START The number of the first bit in the block of bits assigned to the channel of the module installed in the corresponding slot e CH_SIZE The total number of bits assigned to the channel of the module installed in the corresponding slot e CNTRL_START When end to end transmission of control signals is used shows the number of the first bit in the block of bits assigned to carry the control signals of the module installed in the corresponding slot e CNTR
177. ink parameters refer to the Configuration Parameters appendix Remember that even if downloading is enabled you must locally configure the main link SPEED and TIMING on both the local and remote Kilomux units e SPEED Select the main link data rate specified for your Kilomux 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 32 48 56 64 128 192 256 384 512 768 1024 or 1536 kbps If you are reducing the main link data rate the following error conditions may occur while the main link rate is reconfigured The total data rate of the currently active channels may exceed the new rate This will result in CONFIG ERROR 07 bandwidth overflow With a main link data rate of 256 kbps it is not possible to select a KHS 1 channel rate of 192 kbps This will result in CONFIG ERROR 9 With a main link data rate higher than 384 kbps it is not possible to configure a KVC 1 module this module is not supported at this main link rate This will result in CONFIG ERROR 9 To correct the problem change the channel parameters as required e TIMING Select the timing mode specified for your Kilomux When the installed module is KML 1 KML 2 KML 3 or KML 4 the available selections are DTE DCE or E DCE With DCE and E DCE a reference timing source must be selected as explained for the system parameters When the installed module is KML 5 or KML 6 the available selections are INT and LBT When the installed module is KML 7 KML 8 or KML F the available
178. ion The prompt PASSWORD gt indicates that password protection is enabled and you must enter the current password to proceed However if you set the PSWRD section of the DIP switch to ON a null password and node address is used therefore after pressing ENTER you will obtain the working prompt Press ENTER several times to see the working prompt of Kilomux which is by default gt After the Kilomux prompt is displayed on the terminal define the terminal control sequences using the command F or using the command init F Refer to the Command Set Description appendix for more information Typical terminal control sequences are given in the following table Initial Setup and Configuration 2 21 Chapter 2 Installation Kil omux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table 2 8 Typical Terminal Control Sequences Function Terminal Type Tv920 VT52 Clear Screen 1B2A0000 N A Cursor Home 1E000000 1B480000 Cursor Right OCOO00000 1B430000 VT100 Freedom 100 110 Freedom 220 1B5B324A 1B2A0000 1B5B324A 1B5B4800 1E000000 1B5B4800 1B5B3143 OC000000 1B5B3143 If the Kilomux system is not yet configured use the command DEF SYS to define at least one PS module and one KCL 2 module Refer to the Command Set Description appendix for more information Supervisory Port Configuration After completing the procedure given above the supervisory port of Kilomux uses the default values If necessary change the configuration of the SP
179. ion of the terminal to Kilomux refer to Interfaces and Connections on page 2 16 for more information Internal Kilomux Settings The default settings of all the sections of the switch SW3 on the KCL 2 module are OFF To ensure successful establishment of communication with the terminal you may need to change the settings of the PSWRD section switch SW3 in section 3 In general you must enter a password when you start a management session If the password is incorrect Kilomux will not respond The PSWRD section is used to restore the default Kilomux password RAD With this section in the OFF position you can define your own communication parameters password To change to the default values set the sections to ON and then press the RESET push button of the KCL 2 module if not the change will take effect the next time Kilomux is turned on The default values are then loaded and stored After performing this procedure return the switch sections to OFF Supervision Terminal Configure the terminal for the communication parameters you selected for the Kilomux SP port default values are listed above select the full duplex mode and turn terminal echo off Connections Refer to Interfaces and Connections on page 2 16 After making the required connections turn the supervision terminal on When applicable also turn on the modems and any other communication equipment used to connect the terminal to Kilomux Initial Configurat
180. ion the automatic bit allocation algorithm used by Kilomux 2100 must be disabled and the allocation must be manually performed Manual allocation is required for every participating Kilomux 2100 1 24 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information Location A Location C Dropped Info Dropped Info Bypassed Info Figure 1 14 Bypassing Parameters The manual allocation is performed at the level of individual channels therefore the channels of a given I O module can be routed to different Kilomux units This is however possible only if the following conditions are met e The I O modules are not located at a bypassing location i e are not installed in a Kilomux 2100 unit with an active KDI module e The I O modules whose channels are to be routed to different Kilomux units do not use end to end transmission of control signals otherwise all the channels of an I O module using end to end transmission of control signals must be routed to a single module this implies that they must be bypassed or dropped together at the same Kilomux 2100 In the typical bypassing application shown in Figure 1 15 two Kilomux 2104 multiplexers located at two branch offices are connected to Kilomux 2100 located at the central site The KDI module installed in Kilomux 2100 located at the central site provides a direct connection between the two Kilomux 2104 units via the central si
181. ions e The Kilomux diagnostic functions Kilomux TEST OPTIONS General The diagnostic functions accessed by means of TEST OPTIONS include three groups e LED Monitoring of a selected user channel by means of the front panel indicators e ML Control and indication of main link loops Local main link loop Remote main link loop Local ITU T Rec V 54 loop ITU T Rec V 54 loop 2 Diagnostic Tests 5 1 Chapter 5 Diagnostics Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Remote ITU T Rec V 54 loop ITU T Rec V 54 loop 3 e i j Control and indication of channel loops and tests i indicates the module slot number and j indicates the module channel number Local channel loop Remote channel loop Tone injection for voice channels only PRBS pseudo random sequence transmission for data channels only BERT bit error rate test for data channels only Can be performed only if downloading is enabled In addition you can see the test state at the remote Kilomux This function is available only when downloading is enabled Special Considerations When using the Kilomux diagnostic functions pay attention to the following points e When you select a channel for monitoring the monitoring of any previously selected channel is automatically interrupted e Generally at any time only one loop of a given type can be activated on the main link and on each of the user channels However the signal p
182. isory Port General Purpose Parameter Designation CLK_MASTER CLK_FBACK DOWNLOAD BW ML MODE ACTIVE_ML SPEED INTERFACE BUFFER SIZE PROTOCOL SPEED ASYNC_DATA TIMING CTRL SIG CTS RTS CTS DEL INTF TX_LEVEL RX_LEVEL OOS SPEED_BPS DATA PARITY INTERFACE CLEAR SCREEN CURSOR HOME CURSOR RIGHT Default Value INT NONE MIN SINGLE AUTO 64K DCE 8 ASYNC NC 6 DCE LOCAL ON MIN 4 WIRE 8dBm 2dBm F B 9600 8 NONE DCE 00000000 00000000 00000000 Set all the terminal control codes cursor home cursor right and clear screen to 0 or select the control codes corresponding to one of the supported terminals VT 52 VT 100 TV 920 FREEDOM 100 FREEDOM 110 or FREEDOM 220 If your terminal is not compatible with one of the supported terminals use the F command to enter manually the required sequences The codes used by typical terminals are listed in the following table Table F 7 Codes Used by Typical Terminals Terminal Type TV920 VT52 VT100 Freedom 100 110 Freedom 220 1B2A0000 N A 1B5B324A 1B2A0000 1B5B324A 1E000000 1B480000 1B5B4800 1E000000 1B5B4800 OCOO00000 1B430000 1B5B3143 OCOO00000 1B5B3143 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description LOAD DB Note LOAD IO Format NIT F terminal Use 1 To select the control codes for one of the supported terminal types type NIT F terminal lt ENTER gt
183. its bus is electrically disconnected from the other modules installed in the enclosure If the primary KML module or its communication fails the other modules are disconnected from the bus of the failed module and connected to the bus of the redundant KML module which then takes over The operator of the Kilomux 2100 unit can select the primary active KML module e g in order to switch back to the preferred link after redundancy switching has occurred This arrangement provides redundancy at both the module and the link level Dual Link Operation Kilomux 2100 Only I O Modules Basic Dual Link Configurations As an option Kilomux 2100 allows independent operation of its two multiplexing subsystems Therefore by connecting two main links to one Kilomux 2100 equipped with two KML modules it is possible to double the number of payload time slots Two dual link topologies are possible e High capacity point to point link A typical system configuration is shown in Figure 1 11 e Two independent links as shown in Figure 1 12 The two links can operate at different data rates Modules installed in the enclosure can be freely connected to either of the two links the only restriction being that all the subchannels of a given module must be assigned to the same link EE Fs 7 00000 0000o aa ea KMLA 3 ODO Modem Modem KMLB lt eee Q 0000o 0000o bsa Modem Modem KILOMUX 2100 K
184. ization REMOTE SYNC LOSS The remote Kilomux reports the loss of frame synchronization This message can appear only when down loading is enabled INTERFACE TYPE Displays the interface type of the selected KML module ML LOOP Displays the state of the loops on the selected KML module NONE No loop is active R Remote loop active L Local loop active L V54 2 The V 54 loop 2 is active L V54 3 The V 54 loop 3 is active Commands F 43 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Display Format KML 10 Module A typical DSP ST display for a KML 10 module is shown below ACTIVE ML SOFTWARE REVISION HARDWARE REVISION ALARMS INTERFACE TYPE ML 10OOP MAIN LINK B INT E ISDN STATUS PARAMETE ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN PIGGYBACK INTERFACE E IB SW ISDN VERSION RE INTERFACE S DISCONNECT CA CALL STATUS ECTED AAYER1 CONN AAYER2 CONN The general display fields are as follows F 44 Commands ACTIVE ML Displays the currently active KML module ML A for the KML module installed in slot 3 ML B for the module installed in slot 4 or BOTH for a Kilomux operating in the dual link priority bumping or switched backup mode SOFTWARE REVISION The software revision of
185. k aggregate sub system and the system power supply The main link sub system performs main link interfacing multiplexing and demultiplexing functions and provides the timing signals used by the I O modules installed in the enclosure Kilomux 2104 Rear Panel The following figure shows a typical rear view of the Kilomux 2104 enclosure and identifies the I O slots lett 0 CONTROL MNG T ALM RLY m 100 240VAC 0 8A T 250V Figure 1 7 Kilomux 2104 Enclosure Rear View Physical Description 1 9 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Kilomux 2104 Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the Kilomux 2104 enclosure The front panel includes status indicators Refer to the Operation chapter for a description of the front panel functions KILOMUX 2104 eooood REM LOC RX TX ONLINE TST ALM Figure 1 8 Kilomux 2104 Enclosure Front Panel Common Logic Modules The Kilomux enclosure requires one KCL 2 type common logic module The main functions of the KCL 2 module are control of e Multiplexing demultiplexing operations e System management e Interfacing with the optional external system management The KCL 2 module stores the Kilomux database in non volatile memory NVRAM The configuration information stored in the NVRAM is downloaded to the module installed in Kilomux upon turn o
186. l end modem connected to the channel LOOP CH specified by j 1 or 2 of the KLS 1 module installed in the I O slot specified by i 1 through 12 of the local Kilomux unit reports a loop Alarm Messages B 3 Appendix B Alarms Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table B 1 Alarm Messages Cont Code Message Terminal Alarm Description Type 35 IDLE SEQUENCE State The KML 6 module installed in slot SLOT i ML A ML B reports the recognition of an idle code in the data received from the network 36 ML OUT OF SERVICE State The KML 6 module installed in slot ML A ML B SLOT i reports the recognition of an out of service code in the data received from the network 37 ML OUT OF FRAME State The KML 6 module installed in slot SLOT i ML A ML B reports the recognition of an out of frame code in the data received from the network 38 DSU LOOPBACK State The KML 6 module installed in slot SLOT i ML A ML B performs a DSU loopback in response to a network DSU loopback request 39 KTRE KMBE LINK State The KTRE or KMBE module installed in I O slot 1 ERROR SLOT i through 12 of the local Kilomux unit has lost communication with the remote side 40 KTRE KMBE LAN State The KTRE or KMBE module installed in I O slot 1 ERROR SLOT i through 12 of the local Kilomux unit reports that the LAN insertion process failed 41 KDI FRAME Event Frame overflow occurred This usually happens OVERFLOW because the timing of link A is
187. ld disable the whole system However a failure in an I O module affects only a small part of the system and can generally be overcome by using alternate routes putting unused capacity into service etc The Kilomux 2100 system is designed to automatically put a redundant module in service in case the corresponding module fails thereby ensuring continuous system operation in the event of any single module failure Moreover redundant modules may be inserted or removed even while the system operates without disrupting the traffic or degrading the system performance The utilization of the redundant modules is explained in the following section 1 20 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information KPS Module Redundancy The KPS module supplies the operating voltages to Kilomux 2100 A single KPS module can provide the full power requirements of an enclosure However a second KPS module may be added With a redundant KPS module both modules are connected to power and share the load when the system is operating If one module or its power source fails the second module automatically takes up the full load and there is no redundancy To maximize the protection conferred by the use of redundant power supply modules observe the following recommendations e Whenever possible connect each of the two KPS modules to a different power circuit Thus if the circuit breaker that prot
188. le is defective or is not installed ON LINE indicators are located on the KML and KPS modules 4 TXD indicator Indicates activity on the transmit line of the active KML module The indicator is located on the KML module 5 RXD indicator Indicates activity on the receive line of the active KML module The indicator is located on the KML module 6 LOCAL SYNC LOSS Lights when the local Kilomux has lost frame synchronization indicator The indicator is located on the KML module 7 REMOTE SYNC LOSS Lights when a loss of frame synchronization indication is received from the indicator remote Kilomux This indication is available only when downloading is activated The indicator is located on the KML module In addition the front panel includes four indicators that can be connected by means of the TEST OPTIONS MONITOR menu to any desired channel The indicator functions are as follows RTS M LEAD pep E LEAD VOICE DATA CHANNEL Figure 4 3 Indicator Functions e TX Indicates activity on the transmit path of the selected channel e RX Indicates activity on the receive path of the selected channel e RTS M LEAD If the selected channel is a data channel shows the state of the RTS line If the selected channel is a voice channel shows the state of the M lead e DCD E LEAD If the selected channel is a data channel shows the state of the DCD line If the selected channel is a voice channel shows the state of the E lead 4 8 Front
189. lem refer to Chapter 5 Diagnostics to identify the fault and replace the corresponding module Turn Off gt To stop equipment operation use the following procedure 1 If the Kilomux 2100 includes a KM Ringer module first turn the KM Ringer off before the Kilomux 2100 Turn the Kilomux off by setting the ON OFF switches of the KPS modules installed in the enclosure to OFF 4 14 Operating Instructions Chapter 5 Diagnostics 5 1 Alarms The Kilomux generates two types of alarms designated as state and event e A message indicating a state alarm is displayed only when the alarm condition is present and is automatically removed when the condition is cleared if the alarm is being displayed it will disappear only when the display is refreshed by scrolling e A message indicating an event alarm persists even after the event that caused the alarm condition is cleared The alarm messages are sent to the supervision terminal or management station Using the DEF ALM DEBOUNCE command the Kilomux operator can define the debounce time in seconds for each alarm code or mask the alarm Refer to the Alarms appendix for more information and for a list of the alarm messages displayed by the Kilomux If the problem cannot be corrected by carrying out the listed actions have the Kilomux checked by the technical support personnel 5 2 Diagnostic Tests This section describes e The TEST OPTIONS operating instruct
190. lomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Note Note Ending a Control Session To end the control session e Type EXIT The Kilomux prompt will disappear Now you can control Kilomux from its front panel A control session may also be terminated by Kilomux if the idle disconnect time out is enabled or when the DTR line switches to the inactive OFF state The following sections describe how to turn Kilomux on and off the normal indications and what to do in case of a malfunction Turn On If the Kilomux 2100 includes a KM Ringer module first set the KM Ringer module power switch to OFF and then turn the Kilomux on by setting the ON OFF switches located on the rear panels to ON Upon turn on Kilomux decompresses software in flash 30 seconds and then Kilomux performs self test This is indicated by the lighting of the TEST indicator Observe the front panel indications If the Kilomux fails the power up self test the Kilomux must be repaired before it can be used again Refer to the Diagnostics chapter for troubleshooting instructions If the configuration data stored by the Kilomux is corrupted a DB1 CHKSUM ERR alarm message is generated In this case you must load the default configuration as explained in the Configuring Kilomux chapter If the Kilomux 2100 includes a KM Ringer module you may now turn it on by setting its POWER switch to ON The RING VOLTAGE and BATTERY VOLTAGE indicators mus
191. lt SINGLE Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix E Configuration Parameters Table E 1 System Parameters Cont Designation Function Values ACTIVE_ML When redundancy is enabled AUTO Automatic selection of active module allows the selection of the active ML A Module KML A is selected KML module wa tee redundancy switching is overridden ML B Module KML B is selected redundancy switching is overridden Default AUTO In this case upon power up the KML A module is selected as default if both KML modules are installed and operating normally Main Link Configuration Parameters The following table lists the available main link parameters that can be configured from the front panel and their functions The table also lists the parameter values included in the Kilomux default configuration The available parameters depend on the type of main link module installed in the Kilomux enclosure for a complete description of all the configuration parameters of main link modules including the parameters that can be configured only through the supervision port refer to the corresponding main link module Installation and Operation manual Note that when two main link modules of the same type are installed in the Kilomux enclosure the selected parameter values are used by both KML modules parameters used by modules serving only for backup may differ General E 3 Appendix E Configuration Parameters E
192. lternate not active database for editing EXIT End the current control session F Select the codes for clear the screen cursor home and cursor right FLIP ML Change active KML module in a redundant system H Display a concise index of commands and option switches 1 2 3 4 INIT DB Load the default configuration instead of the user configuration Table F 6 lists the default parameter values INIT F Set all the codes for clear the screen cursor home TV920 and cursor right to 0 VT52 VT100 Freedom 100 110 Freedom 220 LOAD DB 1 2 Loads the Kilomux database to a file to enable transfer to a remote Kilomux via FTP LOAD IO Software download to KVF 6 or KVF 8 modules through a DL connection in the modules front panel Kilomux Supervision Language Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation Command LOOP or LP Table 4 2 Kilomux Command Set Index Cont Purpose Options Activate a specified loopback or test ML RECOVERY Recover from a priority bumping event MONITOR Operate the monitor on the selected I O module channel REBUILD Rebuild the Kilomux frame AB FRAME RESET LOC Reset the local Kilomux RESET IO Reset the I O module RESET ML Reset the main link module TIME Set the time of the Kilomux internal clock UPDATE DB 1 2 Updates the Kilomux database from a file with a database package that was received from a remote Kilomux via FTP 4 3 Front Panel Ind
193. ly consumption ratings per voltage or per Maximum Total Power Per Supply is exceeded use one of the following methods The following methods are arranged in decreasing order of preference If any method corrects the power supply current ratings there is no need to proceed with the other methods e Method 1 If you are using a Kilomux 2104 exchange it for a Kilomux 2100 If you are using a Kilomux 2100 install the KPS 6 module A single KPS 6 module can meet the supply requirements of most practical configurations e Method 2 Install an additional KPS module to share the load e Method 3 Split the modules between two Kilomux enclosures consider using a Kilomux 2104 if you need no more than four additional modules You may also try to use an external ringer to supply necessary ring voltages instead of deriving the ring voltage from the installed power supply modules in cases of FXSP voice modules Ratings of Ring and Feed Voltage Supplies RAD offers two special purpose power supply units that can provide DC battery feed and ringdown voltages for the voice modules used with Kilomux e g KVC 1M KVF 4 KVF 8 etc These power supply units are independently powered and do not draw current from the KPS modules installed in Kilomux Site Requirements and Prerequisites 2 7 Chapter 2 Installation Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Ringer 2000 Ringer 2000 is a standalone power supply unit that can provide powe
194. mand for manipulating specific management information within the managed entity The managed entity responds with a setResponse message e trap Management message carrying unsolicited information on extraordinary events e g alarms reported by the managed entity The Management Information Base The management information base MIB includes a collection of managed objects A managed object is defined as a parameter that can be managed such as a performance statistics value The MIB includes the definitions of relevant managed objects Various MIBs can be defined for various management purposes types of equipment etc An object s definition includes the range of values and the access rights e Read only Object value can be read but cannot be set e Read write Object value can be read or set e Write only Object value can be set but cannot be read e Not accessible Object value cannot be read nor set MIB Structure The MIB has an inverted tree like structure with each definition of a managed object forming one leaf located at the end of a branch of that tree Each leaf in the MIB is reached by a unique path therefore by numbering the branching points starting with the top each leaf can be uniquely defined by a sequence of numbers The formal description of the managed objects and the MIB structure is provided in a special standardized format called Abstract Syntax Notation 1 ASN 1 Since the general collection of
195. may not work properly Software Requirements The software necessary to run the Kilomux supervision program is contained in the program EPROM of the KCL 2 module of the Kilomux Kilomux stores all the configuration information generated or altered during the communication with the terminal No information is stored in the terminal Supervisory Port Interface Characteristics Kilomux has an RS 232 asynchronous DCE port designated Supervisory Port Connector CONTROL DCE located on the KCL 2 module This port has a 9 pin D type female connector and is intended for direct connection to terminals Since terminals usually have DTE interfaces the connection to this port is made by means of a straight through cable For connection to a modem you need a cross cable null modem cable 2 8 Equipment Needed Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation The user can select for each port the data rate 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 kbps and the word format number of data bits parity type and number of stop bits The default communication data rate is 9 6 kbps The default word format consists of one start bit eight data bits no parity and one stop bit The SP CONTROL DCE supervisory port continuously monitors the incoming data stream and will immediately respond to any input string received through this port moreover when configured to support management by RADview messages in the RADview protocol are automati
196. n In this case turn the Kilomux off and start the procedure again with DIP switch 3 ON 9 Wait until the sending process has been successfully completed 10 Quit the DL EXE program select the option Q 11 Turn off Kilomux and set DIP switch 3 on the KCL 2 module to OFF The new compressed software is loaded into the module Flash 12 Turn ON Kilomux The TST indicator flashes during decompression After the decompression process is completed the configuration is preserved and the software starts running Cold Local Installation Procedure Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Preparations D 3 Warm Installation Upgrading Procedure Windows Based Stations You can upgrade the KCL 2 software during run time using a PC or a workstation with a TFTP Client application there is no need to turn off Kilomux 1 Run Windows 2 Copy the distribution file km2100 arj to the desired directory of the PC used as a management station 3 Make sure the network management station can communicate with the Kilomux 4 When downloading a remote Kilomux it is necessary to define the downloading station as a manager on the ASCII terminal using the DEF MANAGER LIST command refer to the DEF MANAGER LIST command in the Command Set Description appendix This command is available with version 2 0 and up Downloading Procedure Note 1 Run the TFTP application 2 Set the parameter values in the TFTP clie
197. n frames Frame length varies with the main link data rate as listed in Table 1 1 1 16 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information Note If you are using automatic frame allocation special precautions must be taken to ensure proper operation of the link In general the two Kilomux units must be identically equipped Both units must include the same modules with the following exceptions The KLS 1 in the local Kilomux unit can work with the KLS 2 in the remote Kilomux unit The KVF 4 in the local Kilomux unit can work with the KVF 5 in the remote Kilomux unit The KMBE in the local Kilomux unit can work with the KHS 2 in the remote Kilomux unit The KVF 6 in the local Kilomux unit can work with the KVF 8 in the remote Kilomux unit The order of the modules must be the same in both units and their connections to main link modules must be the same The modules and module channels installed in the two Kilomux units must be identically configured except for parameters that control local interfacing characteristics such as the channel interface type the timing modes etc After each change of configuration that affects the bandwidth utilization e g addition of a new channel selection of a mode that requires end to end signaling etc perform the REBUILD FRAME command on both Kilomux units Table 1 1 Kilomux Multiplexing Data Main Link Rate Frame Length Bandwid
198. n or after system reset Therefore during troubleshooting activities it is possible to temporarily remove the KCL 2 module from the Kilomux 2100 enclosure without disrupting system operation If it is necessary to replace the KCL 2 module the database can be transferred to a new module by installing the NVRAM taken from the original module in the replacement module Main Link Modules The Kilomux enclosure can accept one KML type main link interface module or for Kilomux 2100 two KML type main link interface modules In addition to main link interfacing the KML module performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing functions and provides the timing signals used by the other modules installed in the enclosure Two KML modules are necessary for dual link configurations and for main link redundancy The following main link interface modules are available KML 1 V 35 main link interface module KML 2 V 24 RS 232 main link interface module KML 3 V 36 RS 422 RS 530 main link interface module KML 4 X 21 main link interface module KML 5 G 703 co directional main link interface module KML 6 Standard DDS CSU DSU main link interface module KML 7 T1 main link interface module 1 10 Physical Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information KML 8 E1 main link interface module KML 10 ISDN main link interface module The module can be ordered in two versions e KML 10 S with ISDN S
199. n stoa AA i AAA A A E E 1 10 Common Logic MOCUIES sss cscsseiccscsvevseenstsresscaptessssstobacssdvenseecubeoudoshvonsesasbutaessdsboneess a 1 10 Main Link MOdUlessiicccisssvcthcoststardssoiverssviseantasn canarias tents ana NaN E AE EN 1 10 Power Supply Modules s s0 sisscesebsanicesssesunsstvnaucnavteauss aia a i NSi 1 11 Option Modules Kilomux 2100 Only o oo eee cece eee ceeceeeeeceeeceeeseeeaecaaeseetescnaetaeseeseaeeaes 1 12 VO MOCUIeS ovis tassvsinatecs Sutdvclagnsteueeg SNE EAE EEE lustverdvcennontd app ENA 1 12 1 3 Application CONSIA SEATING assesses n en oeaTA 1 16 Basic KiIOMUK Syste sinenion a a saadace sadgueganabacdehontegueeteontaen cones sebdaagmeaeaauaencotee 1 16 Redundancy Kilomux 2100 Only cece cece eee eee cee ceetee seas teases eeaecaeeseesaesaeseeseeseetantes 1 20 Dual Link Operation Kilomux 2100 Only cece cece eee cee cee eeceaecaeeseeseecaesaeteeeeaeeaees 1 22 Priority Bumping Kilomux 2100 Only sists ounsiesaniavacxaaanicananananen teanaudnsanelatansanlaud dua cadiiniansiions 1 27 Switched Backup Operation Kilomux 2100 Only cee ee eee eects cnee testes cneeteeteeeeaeeaes 1 28 SMCA OGG aen castes AAE R AEEA AEA O E A EA tienes lacastasieacs 1 31 System Manage MENi ssns onenei nka ie sie aies E i aaa ae E E ai 1 33 System Timing Considerations assisia er nai eran Ea S aE EE E Eaa TSt 1 39 Data Channel Clock MOd S ve sccsscscssisseestesreeisvsiensvesess suysveesnspeneededvnarseohboaadeanvonnes soveneeesivin
200. n the Kilomux main board is not set to ON because in such a case the node number is forced to 0 F 24 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description DEF NP Purpose Define the configuration parameters of the network port The configuration parameters depend on the KCL 2 module version e For KCL 2 modules with RS 232 interfaces this command is used to define the communication parameters of the network port select its operating mode network management access port or dial out and when applicable control the use of the call out function The communication parameters of the network port can be different from the communication parameters of the CONTROL port which are selected by means of the DEF SP command e For KCL 2 modules with Ethernet interfaces there is only the ROUTING PROTOCOL field Format DEF NP Use 1 Type DEF NP lt ENTER gt If the KCL 2 module has an Ethernet interface the following is displayed ROUTING PROTOCOL NONE where NONE is the default value If the KCL 2 module has RS 232 interfaces the following is displayed PARITY CALL OUT MODE NONE NO where the parameter values are the default values 2 Change the parameter values as follows Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by pressing the space bar To change the selected field press F or B to scroll among the av
201. nal timing All the other units must use loopback timing adaptive when working with KML 11 to ensure synchronization In this way the unit that operates with internal timing is the source of the master clock and determines timing of the entire network Figure 1 31 and Figure 1 32 show a basic network configuration that uses a KML 5 or KML 6 module in the internal timing mode in conjunction with loopback adaptive for the KML 11 timing Internal Timing Loopback Timing I O Modules I O Modules KILOMUX KILOMUX Figure 1 31 Typical Internal Timing Mode Application KML 5 KML 6 KML 7 KML 8 and KML F Modules Internal Timing Adaptive Timing i Ethernet Network I O Modules I O Modules KILOMUX KILOMUX Figure 1 32 Typical Internal Timing Mode Application KML 11 Module Loopback Timing KML 5 KML 6 KML 7 KML 8 and KML F Modules With loopback timing the main link transmit clock is locked to the receive clock recovered from the receive data signal In effect with loopback timing Kilomux is sending back data at the same rate data is being received The loopback mode can be used as shown in Figure 1 31 however there is an additional important application for the loopback mode as shown in Figure 1 33 In the configuration of Figure 1 33 two Kilomux units communicate through a G 703 link provided by a digital transmission network e g the national network or a private carrier network or by the DDS net
202. nal Switch Label Fl Label Supply 100 240VAC Supply Voltage BS ee Voltage D0 Power Fuse Power Fuse Connector oona 20 Connector PrE Power Connector a 2 A Module KPS 6 Module KPS 7 Module KPS 8 Figure 2 4 KPS Modules Rear Panels Power Connection 1 Check that the ON OFF switches on the KPS modules are set to OFF Refer to Figure 2 4 2 Connect the power cable first to the connector on the KPS module then to the mains outlet Refer to Figure 2 4 Note When redundant power supplies are used it is recommended to connect the power cables to outlets powered by different circuits The KPS 3 and KPS 5 modules do not have a power switch and will start operating as soon as power is connected KCL 2 Module Rear Panel Figure 2 5 shows the rear panels of the KCL 2 module The KCL 2 is ordered with one of the following three Management Port interfaces e 9 pin Dial Port e UTP Ethernet interface e BNC Ethernet interface Table 2 6 describes the functions of the panel components Interfaces and Connections 2 17 Chapter 2 Installation Reset Switch Test Indicator Alarm Indicator Supervisory Port Connector BNC Ethernet Connector E T H E R N E T External DIP Switch Alarm Relay C ALM RLY 2 Item RESET Push button TEST Indicator ALARM Indicator Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Reset Switch
203. nal cannot communicate with the Kilomux enclosure In such a case first make sure the supervision terminal is set for the correct parameters Installing the KCL 2 Module Install the KCL 2 module in slot 5 of Kilomux 2100 Installation and Setup of Kilomux 2 15 Chapter 2 Installation Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual A Warning KPS Module JN Warning Item POWER Switch Label Power Connector with integral fuse for KPS 4 and KPS 6 only 2 6 Interfaces and Connections BEFORE SWITCHING ON THIS INSTRUMENT the protective earth terminals of this instrument must be connected to the protective ground conductor of the mains power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact The protective action must not be negated by use of an extension cord power cable without a protective conductor grounding Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor inside or outside the instrument or disconnecting the protective earth terminal can make this instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited Make sure that only fuses of the required rating are used for replacement The use of repaired fuses and the short circuiting of fuse holders is forbidden Whenever it is likely that the protection offered by fuses has been impaired the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation HIGH VOLTAGE
204. nals not fully supported are as follows e The C control signal is constantly ON e The indication signal is used as follows When the I signal is ON the interface operates normally When the signal is OFF Kilomux sends a continuous MARK binary 1 on the main link G 703 Codirectional Interface Module KML 5 The G 703 codirectional interface complies with all the requirements of ITU T Rec G 703 applicable to codirectional interfaces This interface supports only data rates of 64 and 128 kbps Standard DDS CSU DSU Module KML 6 The KML 6 main link interface complies with AT amp T Pub 62310 Standard Digital Data Service DDS Channel Interface Specifications The interface supports data rates of 9 6 19 2 and 56 kbps T1 Link Interface Module KML 7 The KML 7 module supports both the D4 SF and ESF framing formats in accordance with user s selection Zero suppression over the line is user selectable transparent AMI coding B7ZS or B8ZS The T1 line interface meets the requirements of AT amp T TR 62411 ANSI T1 403 and ITU T Rec G 703 G 704 Jitter performance complies with the requirements of AT amp T TR 62411 1 50 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information E1 Link Interface Module KML 8 The E1 link interface meets the requirements of ITU T Rec G 703 G 704 and G 732 and supports both 256N and 256S multiframes 2 or 16 fram
205. nchronization The clock for KML B can be any relevant internal or external source When a main link operates in DTE timing mode with the other main link as the clock source the receiving main link timing must be locked to the source main link clock by the DEF SYS command defined by the LINK_CLK parameter Loopback Timing DCE Timing KML A I O Modules Clock KILOMUX KML B Any Timing KILOMUX Figure 1 36 Typical DCE from ML Timing Mode Application KML 7 KML 8 KML F Adaptive Timing KML 11 Module When the adaptive timing mode is used with the KML 11 module the source for the adaptive timing signals is VCXO which is controlled by the D A device When the jitter buffer exceeds high jitter length the D A s speed increases the main link rate When the jitter buffer reaches low value the D A s speed decreases the main link rate Application Considerations 1 45 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual The adaptive timing mode can be used in point to point links and in independent networks In any link or network only one Kilomux unit may operate with internal timing and the other with adaptive timing Figure 1 37 shows a typical connection through a IP network using a KML 11 module Internal Timing Adaptive Timing I O Modules 1 0 Modules KILOMUX KILOMUX Figure 1 37 Typical Adaptive Timing Application Main Link Timing C
206. nel ITU T Rec V 54 loops for KLS 1 also activation deactivation e Displaying the state of loops initiated at the remote Kilomux unit Activating Deactivating PRBS Transmission on a Data Channel After the pseudo random sequence PRBS transmission test is activated on the selected data channel as explained in the previous section the next time you select TEST OPTIONS for this channel the second display row shows the current test results e PRBS GOOD ON PRBS transmission is being performed on this channel and no error has been detected on the data channel e PRBS BAD ON PRBS transmission is being performed on this channel and at least one error has been detected This indication is normal if no loopback is connected Activating Deactivating BERT Test on a Data Channel Same as PRBS test except that when the BERT test is initiated a remote channel loop command is automatically sent to the remote Kilomux In this case a BERT BAD ON display always means that errors have been detected Activating Deactivating Tone Injection on a Voice Channel After tone injection is activated on a voice channel the remote subscriber connected to this channel should hear the test tone an 1 kHz tone clearly and loudly If downloading is enabled you can also activate a remote loop in this case the test tone is also heard by the local subscriber Kilomux Diagnostic Functions General The Kilomux diagnostic functions
207. neral Information e Neighbor management with other RAD devices Management information can be sent via a Kilomux to a DXC FCD or MEGAPLEX Link the Kilomux with a RAD device by connecting the NP DTE port of the Kilomux to the SP DCE port of another RAD device Refer to Figure 1 27 RADview Network Management Station or TELNET or SNMP SP DCE Port via SLIP NP DTE Port NP DTE SP DCE SP DCE Port NP DTE MEGAPLEX MEGAPLEX Port SP DCE SP DCE Port Port 4 NP DTE Port Local KILOMUX 2100 Figure 1 27 Neighbor Management with other RAD Devices e There is no indication for the remote loss of frame synchronization or for the loops connected at the remote end of the link e Remote channel loops are activated on the local channel therefore such loops return data toward the remote Kilomux 2100 e It is not possible to simultaneously activate local and remote loops e To perform channel tests by tone injection voice channels or pseudo random sequence transmission test data channels it is necessary to activate a local main link loop or to make an appropriate loopback connection at the remote end of the link Application Considerations 1 37 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Management Communication Port Kilomux is available with a Supervisory Port Connector Control port and with one of the following three Management Port interfaces on t
208. next command option 2 To display the current value of the BER counter and then clear the counter type DSP BERT i j C lt ENTER gt 3 For continuous monitoring of the BER test running on the selected channel type DSP BERT i j lt ENTER gt 4 To stop the monitoring press BREAK or CTRL C DSP CH CON Purpose Display the configuration of all the connected channels i e all the channels for which a main link bandwidth allocation has been defined even if not actually used Format DSP CH CON Use e Type DSP CH CON lt F 34 Commands ENT ER gt Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description The connected channels configuration table is displayed A typical screen is shown below SPEED CONTROL SIGNALS 9 6KBPS OCAL 19 2KBPS OCAL 9 6KBPS The display fields are explained below e CH ij Lists the channel identification For modules for which there are no configurable channels e g for KLS 2 modules only the composite data can be displayed in this case the display shows COMP i e ML Indicates the main link to which the channel is currently connected e SPEED Shows the channel data rate in kbps e CONTROL SIGNALS Displays the control signal support mode for the corresponding channels The following codes can appear LOCAL Channel configured
209. ng an external NTU device e CALL TIME OUT Specifies the maximum time Kilomux 2100 will wait for the connection of the switched backup link If this time expires Kilomux 2100 aborts the connection attempt and generates alarm message 22 The available selections are 30 45 60 and 120 seconds e SW_BACKUP_DB Selects the database that will be used to determine the configuration of the backup link when the switched backup mode is used Refer to the section dealing with the KML 10 module for a description of this parameter Commands F 23 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual DEF NAME Purpose Define the Kilomux node name up to eight alphanumeric characters Format DEF NAME Use 4 To define the Kilomux node name type DEF NAME lt ENTER gt Kilomux displays the node name entry form MAX 8 CHARACT E name 5 Type the desired node name and then press ENTER The name appears on the second line DEF NODE Purpose Define the node number of the Kilomux The allowable range of node numbers is 0 through 255 Format DEF NODE Use 1 To define the Kilomux node number type DEF NODE lt ENTER gt Kilomux displays the node entry form NODE 0 to 255 0 2 Type the desired node number and then press ENTER Note Before entering a node number make sure that the PSWRD switch located o
210. nicate either out of band or in band Out of Band Out of band communication is performed via the serial ports Serial Link Internet Protocol SLIP or Ethernet of the KCL 2 module In Band The user can select the main bandwidth allocated to management and the transmission and routing management protocols The bandwidth for management can be one of the following 2 4 3 2 4 8 9 6 or 19 2 Kbps and depends on main link speed The user can select the bandwidth for main link A and or main link B The following are the minimum recommended management bandwidths e SNMP 9 6 kbps e TELNET 4 8 kbps e PING 2 4 kbps In the transmit direction the SNMP agent encapsulates the management messages in frames and sends them at the selected rate through the selected main link KML A or KML B C 4 IP Environment Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C SNMP Management IP Environment IP Address Structure Under the IP protocol each IP network element SNMP agents network management stations etc is called an IP host and must be assigned an IP address An IP address is a 32 bit number represented as four 8 bit bytes Each byte represents a decimal number in the range of 0 through 255 The address is given in decimal format with the bytes separated by decimal points e g 164 90 70 47 This format is called dotted quad notation An IP address is logically divided into two main portions e Network Porti
211. nk Applications Index A ACTIVE_ML 3 3 Alarm Messages 5 1 Application Considerations Basic System Structure 1 16 Data Channel Clock Modes 1 47 Dual Link Operation 1 22 Main Link Interface Characteristics 1 49 Priority Bumping 1 27 Redundancy 1 20 Sub Link Timing 1 49 Switch Mode 1 31 Switched Backup Operation 1 28 System Timing Considerations 1 39 Timing Modes of ISDN Channels 1 48 AUTOBAUD Function 2 10 Automatic IP Traffic Routing C 6 AUXILIARY_ DEVICE E 9 B B CH E 6 Basic Dual Link Configurations 1 22 Basic System Structure 1 16 BERT Testing 5 10 BUFFER_SIZE 3 4 E 4 Bypassing Configurations 1 23 Channel Parameters Specific Configuration Instructions 3 5 Clear to Send 2 10 CLK_FBACK 3 3 E 2 CLK_MASTER 3 2 E 1 Clock Modes 1 47 CODE E 5 Cold Local Installation Procedure D 1 Commands F 2 Language Syntax 4 1 Options 4 2 Protocol 4 3 Common Logic Module KCL 2 A 1 DP Connector A 3 Communication Port 1 38 Configuration Error Messages B 9 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Connection Data Common Logic Module KCL 2 A 1 DC Power Input Connector A 4 Connection Methods 2 9 Control Logic Modules 1 10 Control Session 4 11 CRC 4 E 5 CTS 2 10 E 8 Current and Power Power Supply Modules 2 3 2 6 D Data 3 5 DATA E 8 Data Carrier Detect 2 10 Data Channel Clock Modes 1 47 Data Set Ready 2 10 Data Terminal Ready 2 9 DC
212. nk Interface Characteristics V 35 Interface Module KML 1 The V 35 interface supports all the interface signals specified by ITU T Rec V 35 Note the following The DTR signal is constantly ON as long as Kilomux is powered The RTS signal is normally ON except when a local main link loop is connected The DSR and CTS signals are handled in accordance with user s selection When the DSR amp CTS parameter is set to external and the DSR and or CTS signals are OFF the transmit data line is continuously held at MARK When the DSR amp CTS parameter is set to internal the DSR and CTS signals are ignored internally interpreted as being continuously ON RS 232 Interface Module KML 2 The RS 232 interface supports all the interface signals specified by EIA RS 232 Refer to the notes regarding the DTR RTS DSR and CTS signals presented for the V 35 interface Application Considerations 1 49 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual V 36 RS 422 RS 530 Interface Module KML 3 The RS 530 interface supports all the interface signals specified by EIA RS 530 with the following exceptions e Refer to the notes regarding the RTS CTS and DSR signals presented for the V 35 interface e The DTR signal is not supported The line is used as ERC external receive clock output line X 21 Interface Module KML 4 The X 21 interface provides partial support for interface signals The sig
213. nly when the priority bumping mode is selected 25 MAIN LINK FLIP ML B Event Main link B is now the active link after a flip from link A This message can be displayed only when the priority bumping mode is selected 26 DATABASE SWITCH TO State The local Kilomux unit automatically switched to DATABASE 1 data base 1 in accordance with the time specified by means of the DEF DB FLIP 27 DATABASE SWITCH TO State The local Kilomux unit automatically switched to DATABASE 2 data base 2 in accordance with the time specified by means of the DEF DB FLIP 28 PSWRD SWITCH ISON Event The PSWRD switch of the KCL module is ON This enforces the default password 29 SP PAR SWITCH IS ON Event The SP PARM switch of the KCL module is ON This enforces the default supervisory port parameters 30 DB INIT SWITCH ISON Event The DB INIT switch of the KCL module is ON This will result in the loading of the default data base parameters when the Kilomux will be turned on or reset 31 REAL TIME CLOCK Event The voltage of the battery that provides power to BATTERY FAILURE the internal real time clock is too low for proper operation and must be replaced as soon as possible The battery test is performed during the power up test only 32 VOICE SYNC LOSS CH State The channel specified by j 1 or 2 of the voice module installed in the I O slot specified by i 1 through 12 of the local Kilomux unit lost synchronization 33 TAIL END MODEM ON State The tai
214. not locked to the timing of link B 42 PIGGY BACK State The KML 7 module installed in the specified slot HARDWARE ERROR A reports a hardware problem on the T1 interface board 43 NETWORK LLB Event A network initiated line loopback has been SLOT i activated This loopback cannot be disconnected by the system management 44 NETWORK PLB Event A network initiated payload loopback has been SLOT i activated This loopback cannot be disconnected by the system management 45 DRIVER FAIL State The KML 8 module installed in the specified I O slot SLOT i reports a hardware failure in the E1 line driver 46 SIGNAL LOSS SLOTi State The KML 8 module installed in the specified slot reports a loss of input signal 47 EXECIVE BPV SLOT i State The number of coding errors detected in the main link signal received by the active main link module is too high the bipolar violation rate exceeds 1x10 for 1000 consecutive seconds This may indicate a fault in the link or in the link transmission equipment or a failure in the active main link module 48 AIS OCCURED SLOT i State The Alarm Indication Signal AIS a framed all ones sequence is received on the main link B 4 Alarm Messages Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarms Table B 1 Alarm Messages Cont Code Message Terminal Alarm Description Type 49 AIS RED ALM SLOT i State The local frame synchronization has been lost because of AIS reception
215. nt and lists the actions required to correct the alarm condition Perform the corrective actions in the given order until the problem is corrected Note In the following table i indicates the slot number contained in the alarm message Code Message Terminal Table B 1 Alarm Messages Alarm Description Type 1 HARDWARE FAILURE State A technical failure has been detected in the module SLOT i installed in the specified slot ML A ML B 1 through 12 Replace the module 2 LOCAL SYNC LOSS State The KML module installed in the specified slot ML A ML B lost synchronization to the incoming data stream May indicate a configuration error or a technical failure 3 B R G FAILURE The baud rate generator of the module installed in SLOT i the specified I O slot 1 through 12 failed Replace the module 4 PS A 5V FAILURE State The 5V voltage provided by the KPS A module is missing or is out of the allowable limits Replace the module 5 PS A 12V FAILURE State One or both of the 12V voltages provided by the KPS A module is missing or is out of the allowable limits Replace the module 6 PS B 5V FAILURE State The 5V voltage provided by the KPS B module is missing or is out of the allowable limits Replace the module 7 PS B 12V FAILURE State One or both of the 12V voltages provided by the KPS B module is missing or is out of the allowable limits Replace the module Alarm Messages B 1 Appendix B Alarms Kilomux 2100 2104
216. nt software as follows Time out 20 sec Total Retransmission 200 sec if available Host IP address of Kilomux Remote File km2100 arj Local File Enter full path for the km2100 arj file Transfer Mode Binary 3 When done press the OK button 4 The file km2100 arj is now sent to Kilomux The TFTP window displays the number of bytes already sent If a fault occurs the transfer stops before the total number of bytes of the KM2100 ARJ file is transferred and a TIME OUT error message is displayed The KCL 2 resets after a failed download so wait at least 2 3 minutes before restarting Restart by displaying the TRANSFER menu 5 After the transfer is successfully completed the KCL 2 module is automatically reset Due to module resetting the new software is decompressed and loaded into the module RAM The red TST indicator flashes during decompression Warm Installation Upgrading Procedure Windows Based Stations D 3 Appendix D Software Download Appendix D Software Download Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual D 4 Warm Installation Upgrading Procedure Windows Based Stations Appendix E Configuration Parameters E 1 General This appendix lists the various parameters that can be used to configure the Kilomux System Configuration Parameters Designation The following table lists the available system configuration parameters that can be configured from the front panel and their functions T
217. o incoming data stream For KVF 5 T1 M card condition is red alarm 80 YELLOW ALARM SLOT State The remote PBX that connects to KVF 5 module lost synchronization to incoming data stream For KVF 5 T1 M card condition is yellow alarm 81 FRAME SLIP SLOT State The number of the SLIP detected in the frame that connects from PBX to KVF 5 card in the slot 82 BPV ERROR SLOT State The number of coding errors detected in the line that connects from PBX to the KVF 5 card in the slot 83 PHASOR OVERFLOW Event Internal overflow in the specified module buffer SLOT slot number 1 through 12 due to difference in clock rates or insufficient buffer size Make sure that the timing modes of the Kilomux main link and I O module are compatible 84 PORT SYNC LOSS State ISDN port sync loss PORT 85 FANS FAILURE Event The FAN that connected to Kilomux failed 86 PORT LOSS OF SIGNAL State Loss of port signal is received when signal is less than 15 dB X2 T6164 87 OVERFLOW PORT State Port over under flow 88 VOICE SYNC LOSS State The port specified by j 1 8 of the voice module PORT installed in the I O slot specified by i 1 12 of the local Kilomux lost synchronization 89 CRC ERROR SLOT Event The I O module reports detection of a CRC error 90 SIGNAL LOSS SLOT State The I O module installed in the specified slot reports a loss of input signal 91 AIS ALARM SLOT State The Alarm Indication Signal AIS a framed all
218. o change the selected field press F or B to scroll among the available selections When the desired selection is displayed press the space bar to move to the next field After the desired parameter values are selected press ENTER The second line of the database flip time definition screen is displayed E TO DATABASE Define the second flipping time To disable the switching between the two databases select NA for all the four fields You should always select NA if the switched backup database is ALTERNATE see DEF ML CALL command 5 After the desired values are selected press ENTER key to end Kilomux displays the time and date fields followed by the Kilomux prompt Purpose Define the communication parameters of the dial out port The communication parameters depend on the KCL 2 module version For KCL 2 modules with RS 232 interfaces this command is used to define the communication parameters of the dial out port select its operating mode network management access port or dial out and when applicable control the use of the call out function The communication parameters of the dial out port can be different from the communication parameters of the CONTROL port which are selected by means of the DEF SP command For KCL 2 modules with Ethernet interfaces there is only the ROUTING PROTOCOL field Commands F 15 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual
219. odule type identifications is shown below Commands F 47 Appendix F Command Set Description ESE ak T E DATABASE CLOCK 1 TIMING ELAY TIME 08 14 34 ML A ML ML 1 The F 48 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual mux name date and time of last reset on KCL 2 OPTION 2 ope KLS 1 N eos KLS 1 N 5 E1 M KVF 4 S0 5 E1 M KVF 4 S0 DATE Mon Jun 08 1998 display fields are as follows NAME Lists the logical name assigned to Kilomux LAST RESET Displays the date and time of the last reset on KCL 2 ON LINE DATABASE Indicates the number of the active database 1or 2 NODAL CLOCK Indicates the source for the link transmit clock the internal oscillator a module channel or the main link ML ML can only appear when the main link timing mode is DTE Refer to the Configuration Parameters appendix for additional information ACTIVE ML Indicates the currently active KML module s ML A for the KML module installed in slot 3 and or ML B for the module installed in slot 4 or BOTH for a Kilomux operating in the dual link priority bumping or switched backup mode ACTIVE ML TIMING Source clock of the agent ML MODE Indicates the current main link mode SINGLE REDUNDANCY DUAL LINK PRIL_BMP SW_BACK MONITOR Indicates the module channel monitored by means of the Kilomux front panel indicators or NONE
220. of main link loops e Test loops activated on the KML modules These loops provide information on the functioning of the KML modules However since the loops are performed at the interface between the Kilomux unit and the other system elements these loops also provide information on the functioning of the complete unit Diagnostic Tests Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Diagnostics User or Test Equipment Caution 1 0 i e Test loops activated on the modem serving the main link provided the modem supports ITU T Rec V 54 loops These loops provide information on the transmission equipment that provides the connection between the two Kilomux units The following explains the main link loops describes the front panel indications that are relevant to the interpretation of the test results and in addition provide a recommended testing sequence that allows the identification of the general location of a fault Local Main Link Loop Always perform a local main link loop on each of the two Kilomux units Local Main Link Loop Signal Path When a local loop is activated on a KML module the main link transmit signal is returned to the input of the main link receive path at a point just before the line interface In order to provide a keep alive signal to the transmission equipment serving the link while the loop is activated the line interface also transmits the signal to the line The loop signal path is
221. ollowed exactly possible bodily injury may occur Warning Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer s Name RAD Data Communications Ltd Manufacturer s Address 24 Raoul Wallenberg St Tel Aviv 69719 Israel declares that the product Product Name Kilomux 2100 conforms to the following standard s or other normative document s EMC EN 55022 1994 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment EN 50082 1992 Electromagnetic compatibility Generic immunity standards for residential commercial and light industry Safety EN 60950 1992 93 Safety of information technology equipment including electrical business equipment Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC The product was tested in a typical configuration TA Haim Karshen VP Quality Tel Aviv March 23 1998 European Contact RAD Data Communications GmbH Otto Hahn Str 28 30 85521 Ottobrunn Riemerling Germany Quick Start Guide This Quick Start Guide is a brief step by step guide to setting up and using your Kilomux It is a supplement to the Kilomux Installation and Operation Manual 1 Installing Kilomux To install Kilomux for more detailed instructions refer to the System Installation and Setup chapter 1 Unpack the equipment 2 Check that your site conforms to the
222. ommands are not accepted for the alternate database In case an error is detected during command evaluation the command is not executed Instead Kilomux will send the erroneous command back to the terminal and you will see BAD COMMAND OR PARAMETER TYPE H FOR HELP The correct command must then be resent The command is executed only after it is validated Command execution can be interrupted by pressing BREAK or CTRL C This will result in the display of the Kilomux prompt and a new command can be entered Kilomux Supervision Language 4 3 Chapter 4 Operation Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual After the command is executed a time stamp is displayed in the following format time HH MM SS date DAY MMM DD YYYY where MMM is written as JAN FEB etc DAY is written as SUN MON etc The supervisory port prompt KM2100 gt is displayed on the line following the time stamp Command Fields When a command has several fields use the space bar to move the cursor among the various fields However for some commands the ENTER key is used instead This is indicated in the command description When a field has a limited range of values the available values can be displayed by scrolling Scrolling is performed by bringing the cursor to the desired field and then pressing the F forward or B backward key until the desired value is displayed If a certain field is not appl
223. omux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table E 1 System Parameters Cont Designation Function Values CLK_FBACK Selects the alternate fallback NONE No fallback source is used BRINE ee forthe pase ik i j Same selections as for CLK_MASTER transmit path to be used in case the master reference fails This parameter is displayed under Default NONE the same conditions the CLK_MASTER parameter is displayed Note If you selected one of the channels as main source do not select the same channel as fallback source DWLD_BW_A Controls the use of the in band NO Disables the in band management management channel A channel In band management channel data rate 0 8 kbps DWLD BW B Controls the use of the in band 1 6 kbps management channel B 2 4 kbps 3 2 kbps 4 8 kbps 9 6 kbps 19 2 kbps Default NO ML_MODE Controls the main link operating SINGLE single main link operation General mode REDUND the two KML modules operate as a redundant pair DUAL_LNK the two KML modules provide two independent links PRI_BMP the two KML modules provide two parallel links with priority bumping SW_BACK switched backup mode one of the KML modules provides the main link and the other module provides a switched backup link SINGLE_SW the single main link is in switch mode DUAL_SW the two KML modules are in switch mode SINGLE amp SW one KML module is in switch mode and the other is in single mode Defau
224. on The network portion is assigned by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA There are five IP address classes A B C D and E However only the classes A B and C are used for IP addressing e Consult your network manager with respect to the class of IP addresses used on your network e The network portion of an IP address can be one two or three bytes long in accordance with the IP address class This arrangement is illustrated in Figure C 1 IP Address Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Class A Network Portion Host Portion Class B Network Portion Host Portion Class C Network Portion Host Portion Figure C 1 IP Address Classes The class of each IP address can be determined from its leftmost byte in accordance with the following table Table C 1 IP Address Class Address Class First Byte Address Range Class A O through 127 0 H H H through 127 H H H Class B 128 through 191 128 H H H through 191 H H H Class C 192 through 223 192 H H H through 223 H H H IP Environment C 5 Appendix C SNMP Management Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Note In the address range numbers indicate bytes that are part of the network portion H indicates bytes that are part of the host portion e Host Portion The host portion is used to identify an individual host connected to the network The host identifier is assigned by the using organization in accordance with its specific needs The all zero host iden
225. on the KCL 2 module has other switches and jumpers that are set by the manufacturer and may not be changed by the user 2 14 Installation and Setup of Kilomux Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation Table 2 4 Module KCL 2 Internal Switch and Jumper Functions Item Function Jumper JP5 Enables disables the internal watchdog function during maintenance ON watchdog enabled normal operation OFF watchdog disabled Default ON Switch SW2 Switch is externally accessible from the panel 1 Determines whether the Supervisory Port is used as a direct terminal or for a SLIP connection ON direct terminal OFF SLIP connection SP Parameters 9600 bps 8 1 N 2 Currently not in use 3 Local basic software download OFF normal function ON download software 4 For debugging purposes Should always be set to OFF Switch SW3 1 Not in use Should always be set to OFF 2 Database initialization Should always be OFF 3 Determines whether Kilomux requires a password when working with a terminal ON requires password OFF does not require password 4 Not in use Should always be set to OFF Nore For Kilomux 2104 the access to DIP Switch SW3 is through a hole in the upper cover Nore You should load the default supervisory port password and communication parameters by setting sections 2 and 3 of DIP Switch SW3 to ON if the current parameters are not known and the supervision termi
226. on Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information Data Channel Clock Modes Kilomux provides several clock modes for data channels The following various system I O modules support all or some of these modes Clock Mode 1 DCE In the DCE clock mode the Kilomux channel provides transmit and receive clocks for the equipment connected to the data sub channel as shown in Figure 1 38 This clock mode is usually required for connection to DTE equipment DTE XMIT Clock A L SH RCV Clock Channel Timing Mode DCE KILOMUX Figure 1 38 Clock Mode 1 DCE Clock Mode 2 DTE1 In the DTE1 clock mode the Kilomux data channel sends data accompanied by clock to the connected equipment and accepts data from the equipment according to the equipment clock as shown in Figure 1 39 In this mode an elastic buffer FIFO is used in the receive path of the channel to absorb timing jitter For KLS 1 data modules the elastic buffer size is 2 bits for KHS 1 data modules the buffer size is 4 bits This clock mode is usually required for tail end connections when a DCE is connected to a data sub channel and its timing is locked to the Kilomux timing XMIT Clock DCE x RCV Clock Peng Channel Timing Mode DTE 1 KILOMUX Figure 1 39 Clock Mode 2 DTE1 Clock Mode 3 DTE2 In the DTE2 clock mode the Kilomux data channel transmits and r
227. one side of the equipment KDI Kilomux 2100 only Bypass and multidrop module The KDI module can be installed in the option slot or in any I O slot The KDI module enables direct transfer bypassing of a group of main link frame bits in both directions between the two main links of Kilomux 2100 Channels that are not bypassed are connected to I O modules of Kilomux 2100 The KDI module is available in two versions e KDI version supports only the bypassing function e KDI M version also includes a data channel interface for one multidrop channel The multidrop channel is compatible with the data channels of the KLS 1 NEW low speed data module and supports data rates in the range of 0 3 to 64 kbps As is standard practice in a multidrop application the receive path of the local multidrop channel continuously receives the data transferred in its allocated bandwidth on the desired main link the same data is also bypassed to the other link to make it available downstream but its transmit path is connected to the main link only when the RTS line in the local interface is asserted For more information see the option module s Installation and Operation Manual Kilomux 2100 supports up to 12 user selected I O modules Kilomux 2104 supports up to 4 user selected I O modules Kilomux can accept any combination of the following types of I O modules with power supply limitations e KVC 1 ADPCM or PCM voice interface module provides
228. ones sequence is received on the I O module 92 AIS RED ALARM SLOT State The local frame synchronization has been lost because of AIS reception 95 TDM DEVICE SLIP State The internal TDM component related to the port PORT specified by j 1 8 of the voice module installed in the I O slot specified by i 1 12 of the local Kilomux reports a slip error 96 REMOTE SYNC LOSS 220 222 PORT Alarm Messages B 7 Appendix B Alarms B 8 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Table B 1 Alarm Messages Cont Code Message Terminal Alarm Description Type 97 CCS COMPRESSION STATE The effective bandwidth required by the CCS OVERFLOW PORT signaling exceeds the available bandwidth on the CCS channel 98 JITTER BUFFER STATE Ethernet frames were dropped because the receive UNDERFLOW buffer of the KML 11 was in underrun state 99 JITTER BUFFER STATE Ethernet frames were dropped because the receive OVERFLOW buffer of the KML 11 was in overrun state 100 SEQUENCE ERROR STATE Ethernet frames received at the corresponding KML 11 interface are not in the right order 101 FCS ERROR STATE Ethernet frames received at the corresponding KML 11 Interface failed the frame checksum FCS check parameter defined as per RFC 2665 102 ALIGNMENT ERROR STATE Ethernet frames received at the corresponding Alarm Messages KML 11 interface are not an integral number of octets in length RFC 1643 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation
229. onfigurations using neighbor management e Local neighbor management Management information is sent to each Kilomux via the NP DTE to SP DCE connections using the IP address of the Kilomux Refer to Figure 1 25 Application Considerations 1 35 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual SP DCE Port NP NTE NP DTE SP DCE via SLIP Port Port Port Port KILOMUX 2100 KILOMUX 2100 KILOMUX 2100 aaa RADview Network Management Station or TELNET or SNMP Figure 1 25 Local Neighbor Management You can also manage multiple Kilomuxes by connecting Kilomuxes to an Ethernet hub This configuration can prevent communication problems due to equipment failure e Remote neighbor management A local Kilomux connects to a remote Kilomux via the main link The remote Kilomux connects Kilomuxes on the remote side using the NP DTE to SP DCE connections Management information is sent via the main link of the local Kilomux to any of the linked remote Kilomuxes using the IP address of the Kilomux Refer to Figure 1 26 Remote Remote Remote KILOMUX 2100 KILOMUX 2100 KILOMUX 2100 NP NTE SP DCE Port Port NP DTE SP DCE Port Port Main Link SP DCE Port via SLIP Local KILOMUX 2100 RADview Network Management Station or TELNET or SNMP Figure 1 26 Remote Neighbor Management 1 36 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Ge
230. onsiderations in Bypassing and Multidrop Configurations In bypassing and multidrop configurations data is directly transferred between the two links of a Kilomux 2100 unit To maintain bit integrity the two links must have a common timing reference All the Kilomux units connected in a system that uses bypassing and multidropping must use a common timing reference The KDI module can be used to determine the reference source for both main links of a Kilomux 2100 by internally locking their timing The available selections are as follows e Link A the clock of main link A serves as the local reference therefore the timing of link B is locked internally to link A timing e Link B the clock of main link B serves as the local reference therefore the timing of link A is locked internally to link B timing e None each link interface receives external timing signals from a common reference source When two links in a system configuration are connected to different channels of a data network neither link can be selected as a timing reference for the other link The channels have their own timing reference The connections are usually made by modems or other data communication equipment that provides receive and transmit timing signals and the two links use DTE timing In this common situation the common timing reference requirement is inherently fulfilled the timing reference is provided by the data transmission network 1 46 Applicati
231. op on main link A type Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description LOOP L ML A lt ENTER gt or LP L ML A lt ENTER gt LOOP V54 2 ML A lt ENTER gt or LP V54 2 ML A lt ENTER gt LOOP V54 3 ML A lt ENTER gt or LP V54 3 ML A lt ENTER gt 2 To activate a specific type of loop on main link B type LOOP L ML B lt ENTER gt or LP L ML B lt ENTER gt LOOP V54 2 ML B lt ENTER gt or LP V54 2 ML B lt ENTER gt LOOP V54 3 ML B lt ENTER gt or LP V54 3 ML B lt ENTER gt 3 To activate a specific type of timed loop on a main link for 5 minutes type LP_R ML B 5 lt ENTER LP_R ML A 5 lt ENTER Note a If Kilomux operates in the SINGLE mode it is not necessary to specify the link e g you can type LOOP L ML lt ENTER gt instead of LOOP L ML A lt ENTER gt or LOOP L ML B lt ENTER gt 4 To activate a test or loop on the desired channel type LOOP L i j lt ENTER gt or LP L i j lt ENTER gt LOOP R i j lt ENTER gt or LP R i j lt ENTER gt LOOP PRBS _INJ i j lt ENTER gt or LP PRBS _INJ i j lt ENTER gt data channel only LOOP BERT i j lt
232. orted by the module whose number has been specified in the command ERROR 28 EGAL COMMAND FOR INSTALLED MODUL The command you have entered is not supported by the module whose number has been specified in the command ERROR 30 EGAL DCD DEL AND INT E COMBINATION The DCD_DEL parameter is not supported by the selected supervisory port interface the DCD DEL parameter must be 0 when the supervisory port interface is DCE ERROR 31 EGAL COMMAND DOWNLOAD NOT SUPPORT The command you have entered cannot be executed when downloading is disabled ERROR 32 ILLEGAL PROTOCOL AND TIMING COMBINATION You are trying to select a channel timing mode for a data channel configured for asynchronous operation ERROR 33 EDUNDANT ML NOT INSTALLI No redundant KML module is installed ERROR 34 DISCONNECT LOOP B E CONFIGURATION CHANG You are trying to change the configuration while a loop is activate this is not allowed ERROR 35 EGAL TIME DIVISION DEFINITION lt day gt The periods defined by means of the DEF AGENDA commands are not correctly sequenced ERROR 36 EGAL DATA BASE FLIP TIM You must define two valid data base flip times ERROR 37 CONFLICT IN INTERFACE AND DSR PARAME You are trying to select DSR ON after the supervisory port interface has been set to DTE ERROR 38
233. oth main and fallback reference timing source ERROR 09 EGAL COMBINATION OF CHANNEL AND ML lt A or e You are trying to select a channel rate of 192 kbps on a KHS 1 channel while the main link data rate is 256 kbps This combination is not allowed therefore you must either increase the main link data rate or reduce the channel rate e You are trying to connect a KVC 1 card when the main link data rate is higher than 384 kbps This combination is not allowed ERROR 10 EGAL LOOP COMBINATION INVOLVING ML RE You are trying to activate on either Kilomux an illegal combination of loops which includes the remote main link loop refer to the Diagnostics chapter ERROR 11 ILLEGAL LOOP COMBINATION INVOLVING ML LOCAL LOOP You are trying to activate on either Kilomux an illegal combination of loops that includes the local main link loop This combination is not allowed refer to the Diagnostics chapter ERROR 12 EGAL LOOP COMBINATION INVOLVING I O RE You are trying to activate on either Kilomux an illegal combination of loops that includes a remote channel loop refer to the Diagnostics chapter ERROR 13 EGAL LOOP COMBINATION INVOLVING I O B You are trying to activate a BERT test on both Kilomux units ERROR 14 EGAL LOOP COMBINATION INVOLVING ML V 54 LOOP2 You are trying to activate on either Kilomux an illegal combination of loops
234. p T CB 119 or set for compliance FCC Rules Part 68A with FCC Rules Part 68A Default 0 133 When the link interface includes a__ For link interfaces with CSU CSU the transmit signal can be attenuated by 7 5 15 or 22 5 dB to a meet the requirements of FCC Rules 7 5 Attenuation of 7 5 dB relative to the Part 68A nominal transmit level 15 Attenuation of 15 dB relative to the nominal transmit level 22 5 Attenuation of 22 5 dB relative to the nominal transmit level Default 0 MODE Selects the operating mode of the SWITCHED Operation with ISDN switch RMESTO Monnle LEASED Operation over leased lines Default LEASED ISDN Selects the service mode for KML 10 5ESS_POINT_TO_POINT AT amp T 4ESS STANDARD modules and 5ESS switches point to point service 5ESS_ MULTIPOINT AT amp T 4ESS and 5ESS switches multipoint service DMS 100 Northern Telecom DMS 100 switch NATIONAL ISDN1 Bellcore NI1 switch EURO_ISDN ETSI Euro ISDN NET3 NTT_ISDN NTT Japanese ISDN implementation Default EURO_ISDN B CH Selects the B channel used by B1 B1 channel General KML 10 modules to carry the user s data when the main link rate is 64 kbps B2 B2 channel Default B1 Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix E Configuration Parameters Table E 2 Main Link Parameters Cont Designation Function Values MAIN LINK IP Determines the main link IP address Four groups of digits ranging from O ADDRESS through 255 s
235. periods e SUBNET MASK Type in the subnet mask in the dotted quad format The mask consists of four groups of digits in the range of 1 through 255 separated by periods The net section must consist of 1 s e DEFAULT GATEWAY Type in the IP address assigned to the DXC SNMP agent in the dotted quad format four groups of digits in the range of 0 through 255 separated by periods e READ COMMUNITY Type the name of the SNMP community that has read only authorization The SNMP agent will accept only getRequest and getNextRequest commands from management stations using that community You may enter up to seven alphanumeric characters e WRITE COMMUNITY Type the name of the SNMP community that has read write authorization The SNMP agent will also accept getRequest commands from management stations using that community You may enter up to seven alphanumeric characters e TRAP COMMUNITY Type the name of the SNMP community to which the SNMP agent will send traps You may enter up to seven alphanumeric characters DEF ALM DEBOUNCE Purpose Define the debounce time in seconds for each alarm code or mask the alarm The debounce time is the amount of time allowed for the alarm code to settle into the on state If the alarm reaches the on state during the debounce time the alarm string with the debounce number is reported to the user Format DEF ALM DEBOUNCE Use 1 Type DEF ALM DEBOUNCE
236. procedure Kilomux presents only those parameters available for the modules installed in the enclosure in the currently selected mode Therefore you must perform the configuration according to this order 1 Select the system parameters 2 Select the main link parameters 3 Set the channel parameters In addition when a supervision terminal is used to control the Kilomux the communication parameters of the supervisory port must also be defined For control of Kilomux test options refer to the Diagnostics chapter General Configuration Procedure Note The following steps are used to perform any configuration activity The general procedure given below is followed by special considerations for each group of parameters Before starting the configuration procedure always disconnect all the user initiated loopbacks select OFF on TEST OPTIONS Refer to the Alarms appendix for an explanation of the configuration error messages the Kilomux displays when you make an error Configuring the System Parameters For a list of the system parameters refer to Appendix E Configuration Parameters Remember that even if downloading is enabled you must locally configure the CLK_MASTER and CLK_FBACK parameters on both the local and the remote Kilomux units if the installed main link interface module is KML 1 KML 2 KML 3 or KML 4 these parameters are not available for KML 5 e CLK_MASTER Select the appropriate source INT or an external
237. r cooling the Maximum Total Power of the module can reach up to 80W KPS 8 no minimal load is required 24VDC AC Redundancy KPS 5 co working with KPS 8 is not possible 48VDC AC Redundancy KPS 3 7 co working with KPS 8 is possible yet not recommended for KPS 7 with preliminary factory calibration 2 6 Site Requirements and Prerequisites Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation Calculating Allowable Power Consumption Use the following procedure to determine whether a Kilomux power supply module can provide the power and current requirements of the modules installed in the enclosure 1 For each voltage category add the Power Consumptions of all the modules to be installed take values from Table 2 1 Example To install KVF 8 FXS KML 1 and KCL 2 the 5V consumption needed is 8 075W 12 is 0 457W 12 is 0 494W 2 Check that the total power consumption for each voltage does not exceed the nominal power consumptions for the chosen power supply For KPS 4 KPS 6 and KPS 7 refer to the note above Example For KPS 5 8 075W lt 15 5 Yes 0 457W lt 4 82 Yes 0 494W lt 4 82 Yes 3 Add together all three power consumptions per voltage for the given application and check that the total power consumption per power supply does not exceed the Maximum Total Power Per Supply For KPS 4 KPS 6 and KPS 7 refer to the note above Example 9 026 lt 25 Yes If any one of the power supp
238. r for up to 60 voice channels Ringer 2000 is intended for installation on shelves or in 19 racks Unit height is only 1U Ringer 2000 is available in AC 115 VAC or 230 VAC or DC 24 VDC or 48 VDC power supply versions Ringer 2200 Ringer 2200 is an enhanced standalone power supply unit that can provide power for up to 120 voice channels This is enough power for a Killomux 2100 chassis fully equipped with 12 KVF 8 modules 96 channels Ringer 2200 is intended for installation on shelves or in 19 racks Unit height is only 1U Ringer 2200 is available in 115 VAC or 230 VAC power supply versions KM Ringer KM Ringer can provide power for up to 32 voice channels or 24 KVF 8 channels KM Ringer is a small unit that can be located on shelves and desktops or installed as a plug in module in a Kilomux 2100 enclosure only It occupies three I O enclosure slots KM Ringer is available in AC 115 to 230 VAC or DC 24 VDC or 48 VDC power supply versions For details see the appropriate Ringer Installation and Operation Manual 2 3 Equipment Needed The following describes the equipment needed to run the Kilomux Terminal Characteristics Any standard ASCII terminal or PC emulating an ASCII terminal equipped with an RS 232 communication interface can be used to control Kilomux operation Make sure to initialize Kilomux for correct terminal operation as explained in Initial Setup and Configuration on page 2 21 otherwise some commands
239. r the redundancy option e Slots 1 and 2 for KPS modules e Slots 3 and 4 for KML modules One slot slot 6 is assigned for an options module e g for the KDI or KAI modules The other 12 slots are intended for I O modules Each I O slot can accept any type of I O module All the modules are inserted through the rear panel The cable connections are also made through the rear panel Figure 1 3 shows a general view of a Kilomux 2100 and identifies the functions of the enclosure slot Physical Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information Resins Commo Medle ee Ss c Main Link Interface Sub system Figure 1 3 Kilomux 2100 Enclosure with Modules General View Kilomux 2100 Rear Panel Figure 1 4 shows a typical rear panel of the Kilomux 2100 enclosure and identifies the slots and their use Note the labels which designate the type of module that can be installed in each slot in addition each slot is keyed therefore it is not possible to install the wrong module type Physical Description 1 7 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Slot 1 2 3 4 5 16 17 18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 117 18 J System Slots I O Slots 2 Power Redundant KML KCL Supply Power Module Module Supply Redundant Options Optional KML Module Module Optional Power Supply Main Link Interface I O Modules Sub system Sub
240. rameters data form is displayed A typical display is shown below PRIMARY NUMBER MAX 20 CHARS ENT PRIMARY NUMBER primary number The second page is used to enter a new primary directory number and the second row displays the current primary directory number The directory number can include up to 20 digits including the and symbols 4 After entering the desired directory number press ENTER Ifthe ALT NUM_MODE parameter is NO no alternate number Kilomux will display the TIME and DATE fields followed by the Kilomux prompt Ifthe ALT NUM_MODE parameter is YES you will see the third page of the call out parameters data form used to enter a new alternate directory number A typical display is shown below EW ALTERNATE NUMBER MAX 20 CHARS URRENT ALTERNATE NUMBER alternate number 5 After entering the desired directory number press ENTER to end DEF CH Purpose Define the configuration parameters of a module or module channel Refer to the relevant module Installation and Operation Manual for a complete listing of the available parameters and for typical channel parameter data forms for each module Format DEF CH 1i j i Use 1 To define the parameters of a specific module channel type DEF CH i j lt ENTER gt where i is either OP to select the options slot or a number in the range of 1 through 12 and
241. rcuit breaker of the panel board that services the equipment and switch it to the OFF position When connecting the DC supply wires first connect the ground wire to the corresponding terminal then the positive pole and last the negative pole Switch the circuit breaker back to the ON position A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably rated and approved should be incorporated in the building installation Connection of Data and Telecommunications Cables Data and telecommunication interfaces are classified according to their safety status The following table lists the status of several standard interfaces If the status of a given port differs from the standard one a notice will be given in the manual Ports Safety Status V 11 V 28 V 35 V 36 RS 530 SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage X 21 10 BaseT 100 BaseT Unbalanced E1 E2 E3 STM DS 2 DS 3 S Interface ISDN Analog voice E amp M Ports which do not present a safety hazard Usually up to 30 VAC or 60 VDC xDSL without feeding voltage TNV 1 Telecommunication Network Voltage 1 Balineed Bl To Sue MT Ports whose normal operating voltage is within the limits of SELV on which overvoltages from telecommunications networks are possible FXS Foreign Exchange Subscriber TNV 2 Telecommunication Network Voltage 2 Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the limits of SELV usually up to 120 VDC or telephone ringing voltages on which overvoltages f
242. real time the main link and power supply status and alert when test loops are present in the system The front panel LED indicators can also be used to monitor on line a selected user channel The monitored functions are transmit data and receive data activities and the state of the RTS and DCD control lines or E and M lines for voice channels Local Kilomux Management A local Kilomux can be managed by any of the following e ASCII terminal connection to the local Kilomux e TELNET connection to the local Kilomux The connection can be via SLIP or via an Ethernet LAN The local Kilomux requires an IP address For information on assigning an IP address refer to the DEF AGENT command in the Command Set Description appendix e RADview network management station connected to the local Kilomux The connection can be via SLIP or via an Ethernet LAN The local Kilomux requires an IP address For information on assigning an IP address refer to the DEF AGENT command in the Command Set Description appendix Remote Kilomux Management A remote Kilomux can be managed either in band or out of band For both the remote Kilomux requires an IP address For information on assigning an IP address refer to the DEF AGENT command in the Command Set Description appendix Functional Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information In Band Management In band management of a remote Kilomux is performed via
243. rect instant Commands F 57 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Kilomux displays the time and date fields note that time has changed followed by the Kilomux prompt UPDATE DB 1 2 Note F 58 Commands Purpose Updates the Kilomux database from a file with a database package that was received from a remote Kilomux via TFTP This enables you to control a remote Kilomux database and to configure other Kilomuxes with the same database Refer to the Load DB 1 2 command Updating the database is performed from a file named CNFG DAT Configure the local remote file of your TFTP application to point to this file Use e Update db 1 lt ENTER gt for the first database of the Kilomux e Update db 2 lt ENTER gt for the second database of the Kilomux Appendix G Kilomux Application Guide G 1 General This appendix presents various applications in which Kilomux 2100 2104 is utilized the applications are divided into groups each for different application type The following main application groups are discussed e Simple Point to Point Applications e CVS Applications e ISDN Applications e Advanced Point to Point Applications e Dual Link Applications G 2 Simple Point to Point Applications Data and Voice Application modem A modem B Figure G 1 Data and Voice Application Simple Point to Point Applications G 1 Appendix G Kilomux Application Guide Kilomux
244. remote Kilomux can be performed either in band refer to Figure 1 22 or out of band refer to Figure 1 24 In these options the remote Kilomux requires an IP address For information on assigning an IP address refer to the DEF AGENT command in the Command Set Description appendix Application Considerations 1 33 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual In Band A remote Kilomux can be managed via the local Kilomux and the data frame Some of the bandwidth of the main link between the two Kilomuxes is used to relay the management information An operator can also download software using the main link Local Remote Main Link gt gt Flow of Management Information via the Data Frame GS Supervision Terminal or TELNET or SNMP Figure 1 22 Remote Management In Band Note Management information can be passed from a local Kilomux to a remote Kilomux via the data frame On the local Kilomux connect a supervision terminal TELNET or SNMP to the KLS1 KLS2 card On the remote Kilomux use a cross cable to link the KLS1 KLS2 card with the SP port on the KCL 2 For a description of this method refer to Figure 1 23 Via Data Frame gam Supervision Terminal or TELNET or SNMP Local Remote KILOMUX KILOMUX SP Port Cross Cable Figure 1 23 Using the Data Frame 1 34 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104
245. rm buffer separate messages are provided for each directory number Appendix F Command Set Description Values 0 no redialing attempts are made in case the call is not established on the first attempt 1 through 8 in case the call is not established on the first attempt Kilomux will redial the specified number of times WAIT_FOR_CONNECT Specifies the time Kilomux will wait for an answer after each dialing attempt If the called station does not answer within the specified time Kilomux disconnects If additional call attempts are allowed Kilomux will redial immediately after disconnecting 30 45 or 60 seconds DIAL_MODE Selects the dialing mode The appropriate dialing mode depends on the dialing mode supported by the telephone network TONE The modem is instructed to use DTMF dialing PULSE The modem is instructed to use pulse dialing ALT_NUM_MODE This parameter is used to control the use of an alternate number The alternate number is dialed used after the specified number of call attempts on the primary number failed NO no alternate number In this case Kilomux stops the call attempts after the specified number of call attempts on the primary number failed YES The use of an alternate number is enabled Commands F 11 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 3 When done press ENTER The second page of the call out pa
246. rom telecommunication networks are not possible These ports are not permitted to be directly connected to external telephone and data lines FXO Foreign Exchange Office xDSL TNV 3 Telecommunication Network Voltage 3 with feeding voltage U Interface ISDN Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the limits of SELV usually up to 120 VDC or telephone ringing voltages on which overvoltages from telecommunication networks are possible Always connect a given port to a port of the same safety status If in doubt seek the assistance of a qualified safety engineer Always make sure that the equipment is grounded before connecting telecommunication cables Do not disconnect the ground connection before disconnecting all telecommunications cables Some SELV and non SELV circuits use the same connectors Use caution when connecting cables Extra caution should be exercised during thunderstorms When using shielded or coaxial cables verify that there is a good ground connection at both ends The earthing and bonding of the ground connections should comply with the local codes The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines In order to reduce the risk there are restrictions on the diameter of wires in the telecom cables between the equipment and the mating connectors Caution To reduce the risk of fire use only No 26
247. s 16A The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short circuit current exceeding 35A Always connect the power cord first to the equipment and then to the wall socket If a power switch is provided in the equipment set it to the OFF position If the power cord cannot be readily disconnected in case of emergency make sure that a readily accessible circuit breaker or emergency switch is installed in the building installation Connection of DC Mains Unless otherwise specified in the manual the DC input to the equipment is floating in reference to the ground Any single pole can be externally grounded Due to the high current capability of DC mains systems care should be taken when connecting the DC supply to avoid short circuits and fire hazards DC units should be installed in a restricted access area i e an area where access is authorized only to qualified service and maintenance personnel Make sure that the DC supply is electrically isolated from any AC source and that the installation complies with the local codes The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power to the product is 16A The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short circuit current exceeding 35A Before connecting the DC supply wires ensure that power is removed form the DC circuit Locate the ci
248. s ENTER The next line of the system parameters data form is displayed Commands F 31 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 4 OPTION KML 10 3 After the desired modules are selected press ENTER The next line of the system parameters data form is displayed A typical line is shown below If you want to include in the Kilomux database a module that is not physically installed e g to preprogram parameters so when the module is installed it will start immediately to operate in the desired mode select the desired module type for each empty slot as mentioned above You can select a module type only if the slot is empty If the slot is not empty it automatically shows the type of the module physically installed in the slot If the installed module is changed the module type is automatically changed in the database 4 After the desired modules are selected press ENTER The last line of the system parameters data form is displayed SLOT 7 8 9 10 11 12 TYPE DB 5 After the desired parameter values are selected press ENTER to end DISCONNECT SWITCH Note F 32 Commands Purpose Disconnects the remote Kilomux from the local Kilomux s main link over the ISDN switch line when the following is true e The Kilomux s main link is configured to manual operation and switch mode refer to DEF ML command e The system is in switch mode refer to D
249. scription appendix e Using an ASCII terminal via a modem connection to the SP port Diagnostic Capabilities The Kilomux system provides extensive diagnostics supervision and maintenance capabilities for easy maintenance and rapid detection and location of faults Kilomux diagnostics include automatic self test upon power up and on line monitoring of critical functions The system generates time stamped alarm messages that cover all the significant system events The time stamp is provided by a real time clock with battery backup The system operator can then perform comprehensive testing on each type of module to determine the cause of the alarm messages and return the system to normal operation Various types of test loops are provided including modem loops 2 and 3 per ITU T Rec V 54 for rapid isolation of the fault area tone injection for rapid testing of voice interface modules and pseudo random sequence transmission test for checking the proper operation of data interface modules and detection of bit errors 1 2 Physical Description Kilomux 2100 General Description 1 6 The Kilomux 2100 system consists of a 19 3U enclosure that contains 18 module slots Five of the slots slots 1 through 5 are assigned to the system modules e The control subsystem e The main link aggregate interface subsystem e The system power supplies Two slots each are assigned for KML and KPS modules respectively to provide support fo
250. selections are DCE INT and LBT When the installed module is KML 11 the available selections are Internal adaptive and DCE IO e When the timing reference is the internal oscillator irrespective of the installed main link module it is not recommended to select clock mode DTE2 for data channels e BUFFER_SIZE If the selected interface type is DTE or E DCE select the appropriate buffer size in accordance with the communication link media 256 bits for satellite links and 8 bits for any other medium e DSR amp CTS If the installed interface module is KML 1 KML 2 or KML 3 select the desired method of handling the DSR and CTS lines INT if you want these lines to be ignored or EXT if you want the transmit data to be held at MARK when either of these lines is OFF 3 4 Setting Configuration Parameters Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Configuring Kilomux Configuring the Channel Parameters The configuration parameters available for each Kilomux user module and for their channels and for specific configuration instructions refer to the corresponding module Installation and Operation Manual contained in Part II of this manual Configuring the SP Parameters Note For a list of the SP parameters refer to Appendix E Configuration Parameters You must always configure the supervisory port parameters locally irrespective of the use of downloading e SPEED Select AUTO whenever feasible In
251. signal ground to float with respect to the frame ground If redundant modules are installed make sure that the jumper is set to the same position on both modules Signal Ground Connected to Frame Ground Signal Ground not Connected to Frame Ground Figure 2 2 Typical KPS Module Location of Internal Jumper Installing the KPS Module To install the KPS module 1 Insert the KPS module in slot 1 2 Ifan additional redundant module is used for Kilomux 2100 only install it in slot 2 For example a KPS 7 module can be used as a backup to an AC power supply module with similar rating e g KPS 6 You can install a redundant module in an operating enclosure without turning off the enclosure power In this case after the module is installed connect its power cable and set its power switch to ON Installation and Setup of Kilomux 2 13 Chapter 2 Installation Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual KCL 2 Module Setting the Internal Switches and Jumpers The KCL 2 module has two four section DIP switches and three user selectable jumpers Their locations are shown in Figure 2 3 Error Reference source not found describes switch and jumper functions JP5 Memory Board Jps a Figure 2 3 Module KCL 2 Internal Switch and Jumpers Note In addition to the switches and jumpers described in this secti
252. sorb short term timing instabilities Buffers size is 8 bits when operating over satellite links the receive buffer size can be increased to 256 bits External DCE Timing KML 1 KML 2 KML 3 KML 4 and KML 11 Modules With external DCE timing Kilomux provides the main link transmit clock signal to the modem and accepts a receive clock signal from the modem In this timing mode it is necessary to specify the transmit timing reference source Two reference sources can be used e External The Kilomux main link transmit timing is synchronized to the transmit clock of a data module channel The desired channel is selected by the operator and must operate in the DTE2 clock mode The external mode is very useful when one or more of the Kilomux channels are connected to a AT amp T DDS link or to a similar data network A typical configuration with the Kilomux units connected as a tail end link for channels using the DDS network is shown in Figure 1 29 The DDS network can provide highly accurate timing and will accept only data with similar accuracy therefore it is necessary to lock the timing of the Kilomux link to the channel timing This is accomplished by operating the modem connected to the left Kilomux in the EXTERNAL timing mode The other modem is set to operate in the LOOPBACK timing mode thereby ensuring that the right Kilomux unit derives its timing reference from the same source E DCE Timing External Source DTE Timin
253. ssrserssrsnierssreerse 1 43 1 33 Typical Loopback Timing Ap PUCatOMs ssssnntessisnnasuaeanseaavasneuaiieonsee deapediuisemensiaehleneemnalasibense 1 44 1 34 Typical DCE from I O Timing Mode Application KML 7 KML 8 KML F sesser 1 44 1 35 Typical DCE from I O Timing Mode Application KML 11 cc cee cece cesses cseecseeteeeeeees 1 45 1 36 Typical DCE from ML Timing Mode Application KML 7 KML 8 KML F nesese 1 45 1 37 Typical Adaptive Timing Aap NCAUON vcs cdeasaerajananndsgibiavncsnstien naan uoahinnagieaminaiaemenee 1 46 1 38 Clock Mode 1 DCE kresie anian e E E E a E AE E 1 47 1 39 Clock Mode 2 DTE1 cccccccccccccssssscscccccceessssssesccsceceeessssescosceseeususssvscesccseeusaussescesceseeeees 1 47 t40 Clo k MGde 3 DIE 2 veces tecdcisss scctece seviedaavecedens E ganveedddpavadedegsnasidddevencsdeanmebdudeavedsceaatnive 1 48 221 Attachment of Brackets sissioni rieni no ani n E Se E EE E 2 12 2 2 Typical KPS Module Location of Internal Umer saiscasssssoas sive voncaatiessavsrsencovanndenieveseedanonss 2 13 2 3 Module KCL 2 Internal Switch and JUMperS ssssssesesreesssriserseresrisrrserssrresrsrresrersrsrresresrrsens 2 14 2 4 KPS Modules Rear Panels c cccccccccccsssssseceeeceeecsesssnsseeeceeeeeceessesssseeeeeesesenenssseeeeeeeeeeeensaaees 2 17 2 5 Module KCL 2 Rear Panel ss ssicceteescdssguvedassacdsdiasansetesasdachs E E EER ERTER 2 18 iv Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 2 6
254. st be off If there is a problem trace the fault by checking the indications in the order given below 1 If the TXD indicator of the remote Kilomux unit does not light the fault occurred in the remote Kilomux unit check by performing a local main link loop on the remote unit 2 If the TXD indicator of the remote Kilomux unit lights but the RXD indicator of the local Kilomux unit does not light probably there is a problem in the transmit path to the local unit There is however a low probability that the fault occurred in the local or remote Kilomux units check by performing local main link loops 3 If the RXD indicator of the local Kilomux unit lights but its TXD indicator is off the local Kilomux unit is defective 4 If the TXD indicator of the local Kilomux unit lights but the remote RXD indicator is off probably there is a problem in the transmit path to the remote unit There is however a low probability that the fault occurred in the remote Kilomux unit check by performing a local main link loop on the remote unit 5 Ifthe RXD indicator of the remote Kilomux unit lights but its LOCAL SYNC LOSS indicator lights a fault is present The fault is in the remote Kilomux check by performing a local main link loop Diagnostic Tests Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Diagnostics Local Main Link Modem Loop Loop 3 The main purpose of the main link modem loop 3 is to check the connections betwe
255. sually includes elastic buffers that absorb small timing differences An elastic buffer is a first in first out FIFO memory with separate write input and read output clocks For example such buffers are inserted in the receive path of the Kilomux KML modules operating in the DTE or external DCE modes Kilomux is designed to support reliable propagation of the timing information by allowing the selection of the appropriate timing mode in accordance with system requirements and the type of main link interface module installed in the unit The following are the different main link interfaces with the available types of timing modes e With KML 1 KML 2 KML 3 and KML 4 modules three main link timing modes are available DTE External DCE and DCE e When operating in the DCE or external DCE modes the timing of the main link transmit clock can be locked to an external source the external clock signal supplied to one of the data channels or derived from an internal oscillator e With KML 5 and KML 6 modules two main link timing modes are available Internal and Loopback e With KML 7 KML 8 and KML F modules three main link timing modes are available Internal Loopback and DCE e The KML 10 module recovers the clock from the receive line signal the recovered clock is used for synchronizing Kilomux Kilomux must operate in the DTE timing mode e With KML 11 module three main link timing modes are available Internal adaptive
256. supervision terminal or to a RADView network management station Connector pin assignment is given in the Alarms appendix 9 pin D type female connector used as a Dial Port dial in dial out Connector pin assignment is given in the Alarms appendix External DIP Switch SW2 Described in Error Reference source not found ALM RLY connector Main Link connector X 21 in this case 2 20 Interfaces and Connections 6 pin RJ 12 connector with dry contacts for relaying alarms from the Kilomux to activate external equipment such as lamps buzzers fans The Alarm Relay connector can also be used to relay external equipment information to the Kilomux such as external sensor information or fan failure Connector rating Max current is 500 mA Max voltage is 50V For pin assignment refer to Appendix A Connector for built in main link Pin assignments and pin functions are same as for the corresponding plug in main link modules of the KM 2100 described in each main link Installation and Operation Manual Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation 2 7 Initial Setup and Configuration When starting a management session for the first time it is recommended to prepare Kilomux for communication with the supervision terminal as explained below The preparations include the setting of switch SW2 3 on the KCL 2 module refer to KCL 2 Module on page 2 14 for more information and the connect
257. t The DSR line of the SP port is switched off for 5 seconds The supervisory port prompt disappears and the TERMINAL ON LINE message previously displayed by Kilomux is replaced by the default display ALARM BUFFER Commands F 49 Appendix F Command Set Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual F FLIP ML F 50 Commands Purpose Define the codes used to be sent to the supervision terminal to perform the following terminal control functions e Clear screen e Move cursor to screen home position e Move cursor to the right by one position This command lets you enter manually the desired codes However if you are using a VT 52 VT 100 TV 920 FREEDOM 100 FREEDOM 110 or FREEDOM 220 terminal or a terminal which is compatible with one of the terminals listed above you can use the INIT F command to select automatically the corresponding control sequences Format Use 1 To display the current codes type F lt ENTER gt The terminal function entry screen is displayed The screen includes three separate lines displayed one after the other A typical screen showing all the three lines is shown below BAR SCREEN hhhhhhhh clear screen code RSOR HOME hhhhhhhh cursor home code RSOR RIGHT hhhhhhhh cursor right code where h indicates hexadecimal digits 2 To change a code bring the cursor under the
258. t in permanent use such as cables used for one time configuration The compliance of the equipment with the regulations for conducted emission on the data lines is dependent on the cable quality The emission is tested for UTP with 80 dB longitudinal conversion loss LCL Unless otherwise specified or described in the manual TNV 1 and TNV 3 ports provide secondary protection against surges on the data lines Primary protectors should be provided in the building installation The equipment is designed to provide adequate protection against electro static discharge ESD However it is good working practice to use caution when connecting cables terminated with plastic connectors without a grounded metal hood such as flat cables to sensitive data lines Before connecting such cables discharge yourself by touching earth ground or wear an ESD preventive wrist strap FCC 15 User Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Installation and Operation manual may cause harmful interference to the radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
259. t light You can verify the Kilomux configuration as explained in the Configuring Kilomux chapter If the configuration does not require modification the Kilomux is ready for operation immediately after self test is completed To change the configuration refer to Chapter 3 Configuring Kilomux 4 12 Operating Instructions Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation Normal Indications e KPS Module s The lamp in the power switch of the KPS module s lights to indicate proper operation e KML Module s The ON LINE indicator of the active module must light The TXD and RXD indicators will light in accordance with the activity on the corresponding line e KCL Module After the initial power up self test the TEST indicator turns off It may turn on again after a test is initiated e KM Ringer Module The RING VOLTAGE and BATTERY VOLTAGE indicators must light to indicate proper operation e KAI Module The KAI module when installed reproduces the indications displayed on the Kilomux 2100 front panel If the other communication equipment on the link is not yet operative the ALARM indicator and or LOCAL SYNC LOSS and or REMOTE SYNC LOSS indicator may light These indicators must turn off as soon as the link with the remote unit is established If the ALARM indicator continues to light this indicates the presence of alarms in the alarm buffer After the alarms are cleared the ALARM indicator should
260. t panel the result is displayed either as GOOD no error has been detected during the last interval or BAD at least one error has already been detected Note that if no loop is present along the signal path the BAD result is expected and does not indicate any problem e On a supervision terminal the test results are displayed as a number in the range of 0 no errors detected during the current measurement interval through 9999 The number of errors is accumulated from the activation of the PRBS transmission During PRBS transmission the tested channel is disconnected from the user data equipment and the DSR line is turned off At any time PRBS transmission can be activated on only one channel of each data I O module installed in the Kilomux unit BERT Testing The BERT test is used to evaluate data transmission through a selected channel of a data I O module without using external test equipment The BERT test can be activated only when the downloading function is enabled and the link to the remote Kilomux operates normally The BERT test is similar to the PRBS transmission test except that before the evaluation of the received data starts a remote channel loop is activated This should cause the sequence to be transmitted along the full path The test results are displayed as for PRBS transmission As for PRBS transmission the BERT test can be activated on only one channel of each data I O module installed in the Kilomux unit
261. te for selected channels The connection is performed by transferring bypassing the desired group of main link frame bits between the two main link modules For example in Figure 1 15 the bypassed time slots could be used to connect between the two KVF 4 modules identified by No 2 which are installed in the two Kilomux 2104 units Application Considerations 1 25 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Remote Site A D KVF4 1 KVF 4 2 _ 4 KVF 4 3 KHS 1 4 fan PABX z Central Site kirni 1 KVF4 5 KVF 4 KML A KVF 4 amp 6 KVF4 gg KML B 4 KHS 1 7 KHS 1 KILOMUX 2100 Remote Site B oom R KVF 4 5 Va N KVF 4 2 a KVF 4 6 KHS 1 7 PABX KILOMUX 2104 g Figure 1 15 Typical Bypassing Application Channels that are not bypassed are connected to users connected to Kilomux 2100 at the central site for example the two channels of the KVF 4 module at location A identified by No 3 are connected to the channels of the KVF 4 module also identified by No 3 which is installed at the central site and the KHS 1 module at location B identified by No 7 is connected to the KHS 1 module
262. ter function used to route management messages automatically The IP router function of each SNMP agent operates both on the in band as well as on the out of band traffic depending if download bandwidth was enabled in the main link for management When using in band communication the IP router can receive the management traffic through each main link via user specified bandwidth of main link IP Environment Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C SNMP Management Subnet Addressing When a large number of Kilomux units are managed by an SNMP management station significant management traffic may be generated Since large networks generally have more than one management station the management traffic load becomes even higher The usual approach to the management of a large network is to split the network into management domains where each management station manages a predefined group of Kilomux units In this case from the point of view of system management the network can be split into several subnetworks as shown in Figure C 2 CJ L Management Station Network B S MBE RAS A f Network A Network C Management Station Management Station MBE RAS A MBE RAS A Figure C 2 Management System Topology Using Subnetting For this purpose the IP router function of Kilomux SNMP agents supports learning filters A learning filter is defined by means of a subnet IP
263. th Bandwidth Available Allocation Unit to User 9 6 kbps 24 bits 0 4 kbps 9 2 kbps 23 units 14 4 kbps 36 bits 0 4 kbps 14 0 kbps 35 units 19 2 kbps 48 bits 0 4 kbps 18 8 kbps 47 units 28 8 kbps 72 bits 0 4 kbps 28 4 kbps 71 units 32 kbps 80 bits 0 4 kbps 31 6 kbps 79 units 48 kbps 60 bits 0 8 kbps 47 2 kbps 59 units 56 kbps 70 bits 0 8 kbps 55 2 kbps 69 units 64 kbps 80 bits 0 8 kbps 63 2 kbps 79 units 128 kbps 160 bits 0 8 kbps 127 2 kbps 159 units 192 kbps 240 bits 0 8 kbps 191 2 kbps 239 units 256 kbps 160 bits 1 6 kbps 254 4 kbps 159 units 384 kbps 240 bits 1 6 kbps 382 4 kbps 239 units 512 kbps 160 bits 3 2 kbps 508 8 kbps 159 units 768 kbps 240 bits 3 2 kbps 764 8 kbps 239 units 1024 kbps 160 bits 6 4 kbps 1017 6 kbps 159 units 1536 kbps 240 bits 6 4 kbps 1529 6 kbps 239 units The allocation of bandwidth is performed in distinct units The bandwidth allocation unit BAU is 0 4 0 8 1 6 3 2 or 6 4 kbps in accordance with the main link data rate see Table 1 1 Application Considerations 1 17 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Bandwidth allocations must be made for the following uses Kilomux frame synchronization In band management channel This channel s main function is to allow a connection to be made to the remote unit by TELNET RADview management or TFTP via the download bandwidth allocation Through in band management some of
264. that includes a main link ITU T Rec V 54 loop 2 refer to the Diagnostics chapter ERROR 15 EGAL LOOP COMBINATION INVOLVING ML V 54 LOOP3 You are trying to activate on either Kilomux an illegal combination of loops that includes a main link ITU T Rec V 54 loop 3 refer to the Diagnostics chapter B 10 Configuration Error Messages Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarms ERROR 16 ILLEGAL KLS 2 COMPOSITE AND ML lt A or B gt SPEE COMBINATION The Kilomux main link rate is 256 or 384 kbps and you are trying to configure a KLS 2 module for a composite data rate of 2 4 kbps This combination of main link and composite data rates is not allowable because it would require oversampling ERROR 17 E NOT COMPATIBLE WITH I O SLOT LINK SE The selected main link mode is not compatible with the selections made for the I O modules i e some modules have been connected to main link A and others to main link B but the current main link mode is SINGLE REDUNDANCY or SWITCHED BACKUP ERROR 18 TIMING SPEED NOT COMPATIBLE WITH ML MODULE You are trying to select a timing mode and or speed that is not supported by the installed KML module ERROR 19 EGAL ML MODE FOR WORKING WITH LCD The main link mode selected by the operator on the Kilomux front panel is not allowed because the required parameters cannot
265. the requirements of EN60950 For your protection and to prevent possible damage to equipment when a fault condition e g lightning stroke or contact with high voltage power lines occurs on the lines connected to the equipment the case of the Kilomux unit must be properly grounded at any time Any interruption of the protective grounding connection inside or outside the equipment or the disconnection ofthe protective ground terminal can make this equipment dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited Before switching on this equipment and before connecting any cables the protective ground terminals of the equipment must be connected to a protective ground The grounding arrangements depend on the equipment power supply source e AC powered units the grounding connection is made through the mains plug which must be inserted in a power socket outlet with protective ground contact Do not negate the protective ground contact by using an extension cord power cable without a protective conductor grounding e DC powered units the grounding connection is made through one of the pins of the DC power connector e In addition all units PS modules have a grounding terminal connect it to the nearest grounding point using a short wide copper braid or a thick copper wire Whenever possible the Kilomux units should be installed in a properly grounded rack connected to a reliable low resistance grounding system 2 2 Site R
266. the bandwidth of the main link between the local Kilomux and the remote Kilomux is used to relay management information Channel data Channel end to end signaling The following table provides bandwidth allocation information The use of the information presented in the table to calculate the bandwidth required for various operating configurations is illustrated by a numerical example that follows the table 1 18 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information Use Frame Synchronization Management Channel Channel Data All Modules KHS 2 Only Channel End to End Control Signals Table 1 2 Bandwidth Allocations Allocation Units Allocation Rule 1 Mandatory Depends on Main Link Rate Optional at least 9 6 kbps recommended Channel Main Link Rate in kbps used Bandwidth Allocation Unit kbps rate in parenthesis 9 6to32 48to192 256 384 512 768 1024 1536 0 4 0 8 1 6 3 2 6 4 300 bps 3 3 3 3 In accordance with 600 bps 3 3 3 3 channel data rate 1 2 kbps 3 3 3 3 Theoretical 2 4 kbps 6 3 3 3 minimum is 1 4 8 kbps 12 6 3 3 allocation unit per 6 4 kbps 16 8 4 2 active channel For 7 2 kbps 18 9 low rate data i e 8 kbps 20 10 5 for data rates lower 9 6 kbps 24 12 6 3 than the bandwidth 14 4 kbps 36 18 9 allocation unit 16 kbps 40 20 10 5 oversampling is used 19 2kbps 48 24 12 6 3 to achieve an integer 24 kbps 60 3
267. the transmission of the alarm buffer contents Kilomux disconnects automatically To increase reporting reliability Kilomux enables the user to define the number of dialing retries and an alternate number to be called in case the primary number cannot be reached If the call cannot be established the full contents of the buffer are sent the next time a call is set up 1 38 Application Considerations Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information System Timing Considerations One of the critical requirements of data communications networks is timing accuracy The basic requirement is that all the equipment in the network must operate at exactly the same clock rate or at an integer sub multiple of the clock rate If this condition is not met then from time to time bits transmitted between two equipment units that operate at even slightly different clock rates will be lost or the same bit may be read twice Such occurrences which lead to the loss of bit count integrity are highly undesirable and may cause severe and periodic disruptions in network operation Many networks use very accurate timing sources such as atomic clocks to provide the primary timing signals to the main network nodes e g telephone switching offices digital switches etc From the nodes the timing is disseminated via the communication links Since very accurate timing sources are often free running communication equipment u
268. this case start the communication by pressing lt ENTER gt three times to ensure positive identification of terminal data rate The automatic baud rate recognition procedure should be repeated after the DTR line in the SP connector had been switched to OFF and then ON again e DATA Select the required number of data bits same as on the terminal e PARITY Select the required parity same as on the terminal Select DCE when directly connected to the supervision terminal In this case you need a straight cable Select DTE when connected to a modem In this case use a cross over cable for connection to the modem e MANAGEMENT Select YES when the Kilomux will be managed by a RADview network management station Select NO in any other case Setting Configuration Parameters 3 5 Chapter 3 Configuring Kilomux Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 3 6 Setting Configuration Parameters Chapter 4 Operation 4 1 General This chapter describes the normal operation of the Kilomux The information in this chapter includes e Description of the supervision terminal set of commands syntax options protocol and descriptions e Description of the functions of the Kilomux controls connectors and indicators located on the Kilomux front panel e General operating instructions including turn on routine operations and turn off For an explanation of the error messages that may be displayed on the supervisory
269. tifier is always interpreted as a network identifier and must not be assigned to an actual host e Often the host portion is further sub divided into two portions Subnet Number For example subnet numbers can be used to identify departmental subnetworks The subnet number follows the network identifier Host Number the last bits of the IP address Net and Subnet Masks Net and subnet masks are used to help filter the relevant traffic more efficiently the function of the net and subnet mask is to specify how many of the IP address bits are actually used for the net identifier and for the subnet number The mask is a 32 bit word that includes ones in the positions used for net and subnet identifications followed by zeros up to the end of the IP address For example the subnet mask corresponding to the Class C IP address 194 227 31 67 is 255 255 255 000 Recommendations for the Selection of IP Addresses When the Kilomux SNMP agent and its management station are connected to the same network the network identifier part of the IP address assigned to the SNMP agent must be identical to the network identifier part of the IP address of the management station However the agent and the Kilomux SNMP management station can also be on different IP networks In this case each one will assigned IP addresses according to its IP network Automatic IP Traffic Routing C 6 The SNMP agent of Kilomux includes an IP rou
270. timing reference source connected to one of the channels of a KLS 1 KHS 1 KVF 4 SO KHS U S KHS U D KVF 5 E1 M or KVF 5 T1 M module In this case you must select the CLOCK MODE of this channel as DTE2 otherwise you will see CONFIG ERROR 01 3 2 Setting Configuration Parameters Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Configuring Kilomux Note Note CLK_FBACK Select NONE or a source different from that selected as master If you select as external source a channel that is not configured for operation in the DTE2 mode you will see CONFIG ERROR 02 To disable switching to the fallback source select NONE In this case the default fallback clock source is the Kilomux internal clock oscillator DWLD_BW_A DWLD_BW B Select the desired mode NO to disable the management channel or enable the management channel by selecting a specific value in the range of 0 8 through 19 2 kbps and an EXT to indicate if the ML 7 or ML 8 is a dedicated time slot or time slot 0 These parameters must be set in order to allow in band configuration of a remote Kilomux For more information about in band communication refer to the Remote Management section in the General Information chapter When selecting a speed for the download parameter consider the Kilomux link s total bandwidth Since the bandwidth is shared make sure that the speed chosen for the download parameter is high enough to allow the link to work efficiently
271. turn off What to do in Case of Malfunction In case a malfunction occurs perform the following preliminary checks and actions e Check that the modules are properly installed and inserted in the slots specified by the installation plan e Check that all the cable connections were made in accordance with the installation plan e If upon turn on the Kilomux displays a DB CHKSUM ERR message refer to Chapter 2 Installation and do the following 1 Turn the Kilomux off 2 Remove the KCL module set section 2 of switch SW3 to ON and reinstall the KCL module 3 Turn the Kilomux on wait until the self test is successfully completed then turn the unit off 4 Remove the KCL module set section 2 of switch SW3 to OFF and reinstall the KCL module e The default data base configuration has now been loaded You may now start the configuration activities based on the known set of default parameter values Operating Instructions 4 13 Chapter 4 Operation Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Check the settings of switch SW3 on the KCL module Section 1 Master Slave OFF Section 2 DB INIT OFF Section 3 PSWRD OFF Section 4 DEBUG OFF Check that all the communication equipment serving the main links operates properly Check all the configuration parameters against the prescribed set of parameters Press the RESET push button of the KCL module If these actions do not correct the prob
272. twork e BNC connector to an Ethernet network Connector pin allocation is given in Appendix A Described in Error Reference source not found 6 pin RJ 12 connector with dry contacts for relaying alarms from the Kilomux to activate external equipment such as lamps buzzers fans The Alarm Relay connector can also be used to relay external equipment information to the Kilomux such as external sensor information or fan failure Connector rating Max current is 500 mA Max voltage is 50V For pinout refer to Appendix A Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation Connections to the Supervisory Port KCL 2 Module Find the supervision cable intended for connection to the enclosure and connect it to the SP connector on the KCL 2 module If the optional dial out port is to be used connect the corresponding cable to the MNG connector on the KCL 2 module Connections to the Alarm Relay Connector KCL 2 Module Connect the external equipment to the RJ 12 Alarm Relay connector according to the pin assignment described in Appendix A The connector functions as a dry contact relay Under normal conditions the Normally Closed NC pin is shorted with the Common contact When a Kilomux alarm occurs the Common contact will instead be shorted to the Normally Open NO pin and the device connected to the connector will be activated similarly to how the Alarm LED on the Kilomux front panel is activated
273. type interface The S interface operates as Terminal Adapter TE side intended for connection to standard Network Termination NT unit e KML 10 U with ISDN U type interface The U interface operates as Network Termination NT side unit intended for connection to standard Line Termination LT unit KML 11 Main link over IP interface module The module can be ordered with in two types of Ethernet port e UTP for 10 100BaseT interface with an RJ 45 connector e MMIC for 100BaseF multimode fiber optic interface with an LC connector KML F Fiber optic main link interface module The module can be with various types of optical interfaces laser or LED transmitters for single mode and multi mode fiber optic cable For more information see each main link module s Installation and Operation Manual Power Supply Modules The Kilomux 2100 enclosure can accept one or two KPS type power supply modules Several types of power supply modules are available KPS 3 25W power supply module for 48 VDC power KPS 4 50W power supply module for 100 to 240 VAC mains KPS 5 25W power supply module for 24 VDC power KPS 6 56W power supply module for 100 to 240 VAC mains KPS 7 56W power supply module for 48 VDC mains KPS 8 130W power supply module for 100 to 240 VAC mains Two KPS modules are necessary for redundancy when both modules are operational they share the load whereas in case of failure or loss of input power the remain
274. ule replace that module Operating Instructions 4 9 Chapter 4 Operation Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Starting a Session Single Kilomux When the terminal is used to control a single Kilomux always assign node address 0 to Kilomux Use the following start up sequence to connect to a Kilomux assigned node number 0 1 If you use the AUTO Autobaud mode press the ENTER key three times This allows Kilomux to identify the terminal data rate Assuming that Kilomux successfully identified the data rate of the supervision terminal you will be notified if Kilomux failed the power up self test If you see Kilomux 2100 SELFTEST FAILED Kilomux must first be repaired before you can continue using it If Kilomux successfully passed the power up self test it displays the following EL gt Kilomux 2100 SUPERVISORY PORT ON LINE E H FOR HE where lt BEL gt stands for the graphic symbol of the lt BEL gt code ASCII 07 After the self test the Kilomux prompt should already be displayed on the terminal screen after the ON LINE announcement If you see this indicates that password protection is enabled 2 In this case type password and press ENTER where password stands for the current password four to eight characters The default password is RAD If your password is accepted you will see the prompt KM2100 gt Kilomux is now in session
275. ules that can directly connect to PBX lines and two wire telephone sets the KVC series of modules e 2W and 4W interface voice fax low bit rate KVF 4 and KVF 8 modules e T1 and E1 PBX trunk interface KVF 5 and KVF 6 modules e Token ring extender module KTRE e Ethernet Bridge Router module KMBE KMBE N e Bypass and multidrop module KDI for Kilomux 2100 only Detailed information on the specific Kilomux modules can be found in the separate module Installation and Operation Manuals Figure 1 1 illustrates the basic capabilities of the Kilomux 2100 system Functional Description 1 1 Chapter 1 General Information Tie Lines Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual RADview Network Management Station Ethernet Network Ethernet Port v 35 KVF5 RS 530 V 36 KC RS 232 V 24 kocmi 3 X 21 5 lt o z e J KILOMUX 2100 CAD CAM Fax KLS 1 LL q G 703 Codirectional Standard DDS ISDN E1 T1 Fiber Optic IP KLS 1 1 O Modu KILOMUX 2100 SP Port or SLIP Supervision Terminal or TELNET or SNMP Figure 1 1 Kilomux 2100 System Applications 1 2 Functional Description Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information The Kilomux 2104
276. under your control On your terminal you will see the prompt KM2100 gt or KM2104 gt On the Kilomux front panel you will see the message TERMINAL ON LINE The front panel controls are disabled as long as Kilomux is under remote control 3 Before you continue use the F command to select the proper cursor control codes otherwise the DEF commands may not work properly Note while the supervision terminal is in session with Kilomux the Kilomux local operator can regain control by disconnecting the cable from the Kilomux SP connector or by sending the EXIT command Kilomux will automatically return to front panel control if no commands are received for a certain time controlled by the LOG_OFF parameter This time out can be disabled 4 10 Operating Instructions Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation Starting a Session Multiple Kilomux When one terminal is used to control several Kilomux units connected via modems node addresses are assigned to each Kilomux The node addresses in the range of 1 through 255 are assigned during the first session by means of the command NODE Note If you are using a multidrop configuration do not assign address O to any Kilomux connected to this terminal gt To establish a session with a specific Kilomux 1 Press the ENTER key three times 2 Type NODE space the desired Kilomux node address and another space then type t
277. upon power up Since the Flash memory is not used to run the software new software can be loaded in two ways Off line using any PC directly connected to the Supervisory Port of the KCL 2 module In this case the Kilomux system cannot carry traffic while software downloading takes place This procedure can be used to upgrade the module software version as well as to install software in a new KCL 2 module e g a repaired module This installation method is called cold or local software installation The cold software installation process must be performed from the DOS prompt only use a DOS window under Windows The program DL EXE is required for performing the cold installation On line use TFTP software directly or through other Kilomux systems without stopping the operation of the Kilomux system in which the KCL 2 module is installed This procedure can only be used to upgrade the module software version while the equipment operates and therefore it is called warm or remote software installation Software releases are distributed as a compressed software file KM2100 AR D 2 Cold Local Installation Procedure Download Procedure 1 Copy the distribution files KM2100 ARJ and DL EXE to a convenient directory on your PC Set DIP switch 3 on the KCL 2 back panel to ON Turn Kilomux on and wait a few seconds Cold Local Installation Procedure D 1 Appendix D Software Download D 2 Note Note 4 5
278. upported only when the Control port interface selected by means of the internal KCL 2 switches Commands F 29 Appendix F Command Set Description DEF SYS Purpose Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Assign values to system parameters Format DEF SYS Use 1 To define system parameters type DEF SYS lt ENTER gt The first line of the system parameters data form is displayed A typical form is shown below The form presents the current parameter values as defaults CLK FBACK N A LINK_CLK ML A DWLD BWA DWLD BW B NO NO RESET VOICI DISABLE ML MODE DUAL LNK ML R AUTO The parameters displayed on the first page are listed in Table F 5 Designation CLK_MASTER CLK_FBACK Table F 5 System Parameters Function Selects the main and fallback clock sources when the main links use independent timing i e when NONE is selected for the LINK_CLK parameter When using a KDI module for drop and insert purposes it may be necessary to lock the main link timing by selecting ML A or ML B for the LINK_CLK parameter in this case this field shows N A not applicable Values DWLD_BW_A DWLD_BW_B F 30 Commands Controls the use of management channels A or B Note These parameters must be set in order to allow in band configuration of a remote Kilomux When selecting a speed for the download param
279. ust as in a point to point connection When the RTS line is deasserted at the end of DTE transmission the KDI M module stops dropping the channel data and the bypassing path is re established K KDI KC ee KCL KILOMUX 2100 KILOMUX 2100 KILOMUX 2100 Figure 1 16 Typical KDI Bypassing and Multidrop Application Priority Bumping Kilomux 2100 Only With optional point to point dual link configurations such as shown in Figure 1 11 Kilomux 2100 allows to provide the equivalent of hot standby protection to critical data channels without paying for unutilized bandwidth This feature is called priority bumping Application Considerations 1 27 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual When priority bumping is selected the system administrator can define the critical channels as high priority channels The high priority channels can be assigned time slots on either of the two links in accordance with system requirements Low priority channels can then be added up to the maximum combined bandwidth of the two links When the two main links operate at different data rates it is possible to select different priorities for switching from link A to link B and from link B to link A During normal operation i e when both links are operational all the channels are carried by the assigned links When one of the links fails the high priority channels carried by the failed link
280. ust end by pressing ENTER To use a command with the existing parameters type the command name and press ENTER To cancel the current command press the BREAK key or CTRL C that is hold the CTRL key down and type C You will obtain the Kilomux prompt again To repeat the previous command press CTRL A To repeat the previous command followed by pressing ENTER press CTRL D Command Options 4 2 The following general types of options shown in Table 4 1 are available with some commands For details refer to the relevant appendix Table 4 1 General Command Options Option Meaning IA All IC Clear ICA Clear all Display all the relevant information for the requested item Kilomux Supervision Language Example of Usage CLR ALM A Clears all the alarms stored by the alarm buffer DSP ALM C Display all the alarms stored by the alarm buffer and then clear all the event alarms DSP ALM CA Display all the alarms stored by the alarm buffer and then clear all the alarms DSP REV Displays the hardware and software revisions of all the modules installed in Kilomux Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation Command Protocol Starting a Session If AUTOBAUD is on start any session by pressing the ENTER key three times in sequence This will ensure identification of terminal data rate When password protection is on the displayed prompt is PASSWORD gt and the addressed Kilomu
281. ux can be configured to operate in one of the following switch modes e Single Switch Mode Kilomux 2100 and Kilomux 2104 The local Kilomux is connected to a remote Kilomux via an ISDN network allocated on a single main link either Main Link A or Main Link B Refer to Figure 1 19 D Remote KILOMUX Main Link A SP Port or SLIP KILOMUX Supervision Terminal or TELNET or SNMP Figure 1 19 Single Switch Mode e Dual Switch Mode Kilomux 2100 only The local Kilomux 2100 is connected to two remote Kilomuxes via an ISDN network allocated to both Main Link A and Main Link B Refer to Figure 1 20 Remote KILOMUX Main Link A Main Link B SP Port KILOMUX 2100 or SLIP Remote KILOMUX CERSA Supervision Terminal or TELNET or SNMP Figure 1 20 Dual Switch Mode Application Considerations 1 31 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Single and Switch Mode Kilomux 2100 only The local Kilomux 2100 is connected to a remote Kilomux via one of the main links Main Link A or Main Link B The local Kilomux 2100 is also connected to a second remote Kilomux via the other main link over an ISDN network Refer to the following figure Main Link A a Remote Main Link B ISDN KILOMUX Network Local SP Port KILOMUX 2100 aX or SLIP Remote KILOMUX Supervision Terminal or TELNET or SNMP Figur
282. view network management station When main link bandwidth is allocated to the Kilomux management channel the parameters that must be used by both Kilomux units connected by the main link can also be downloaded from one of the units to the other unit After the operating parameters have been selected a process called configuration set up the Kilomux no longer requires operator attendance The configuration stored in the Kilomux memory is not affected when the power is turned off Upon power up the stored configuration is retrieved and its validity is checked during the power up self test e If everything is OK after power up the Kilomux assumes the last selected configuration and is immediately ready for operation unless the user wants to change the system configuration e f errors are detected in the configuration data the Kilomux lets you load a default configuration in its place The default configuration prepared by the manufacturer is stored in the program EPROM The user can later modify the default values as required Control of Kilomux Operation 3 1 Chapter 3 Configuring Kilomux Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Note 3 3 Setting Configuration Parameters Before starting any configuration action e Obtain a list of the required parameters from your system administrator e Review the relevant configuration parameters given in the Configuration Parameters appendix During the configuration set up
283. with the remote Kilomux due to loopback activation on main link A or B 69 MGMT PORT IS DOWN State Kilomux cannot communicate to the remote ML i Kilomux via in band management channel in main link A or B 70 AGENTS WITH SAME Event There is an agent with the same name in the NAME IN NET network 71 CONTOLR TAKEN BY Event Kilomux is controlled by SNMP management station SNMP MMI 72 CONTOLR TAKEN BY Event Kilomux is controlled by ASCII terminal TERM MMI 73 CONTOLR TAKEN BY Event Kilomux is controlled by LCD LCD MMI 74 KCL WARE ERROR KCL State Hardware error occurred during self test of COMMON LOGIC Card 75 HARDWARE State Hardware error occurred during self test of I O i ERROR IO i slot 1 through 12 card It can also occur due to a slip in the NSFIFO chip on the card 76 HARDWARE State Hardware error occurred during self test of Main ERROR ML i Link i ML A or ML B card It can also occur due to a slip in the NSFIFO chip on the card 77 ALARM BUFFER EMPTY Event Appears when the user requests the alarm buffer list from a RADview station and the list is empty 78 FRAGMENTATION IN Event Fragmentation in frame allocation of main link Can FRAME ALLOCATION Alarm Messages occur when boding is enabled in KML 10 parameters Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarms Table B 1 Alarm Messages Cont Code Message Terminal Alarm Description Type 79 RED ALARM SLOT State Local KVF 5 master module lost synchronization t
284. wo Kilomux connected in a link must be identical and correct parameters must be selected e For automatic allocation check the modules in the local and remote units have compatible offsets and parameters e For normal allocation check that connected channels have compatible parameters ERROR 207 INCOMPLETE E ALLOCATION Check your manual frame bit allocation and correct ERROR 208 1 ES CANNOT BI Make sure that one of the Kilomux units connected in a link is defined as local and the other as remote B 14 Configuration Error Messages Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarms ERROR 209 CHANNEL SOURCI ER FALLBACK CLOCK DO You are trying to select a channel that is not physically present as the clock source ERROR 210 INVALID ML B CARD TYPE FOR SWITCH BACKUP ML MODI You can select the switched backed mode only when a KML 1 KML 2 KML 3 or KML 10 module is installed ERROR 211 E NOT COMPATIBLE WITH NO OF ML Before selecting the dual link or priority bumping mode make sure to configure two links ERROR 212 CONNECTED MUXES SHOULD CONFIGURATIONS For two Kilomux connected in a link always define the same number of data bases either one or two data bases on each unit ERROR 213 KM2104 CAN HAVE ONLY ONE You are trying to define a secon
285. work Such networks usually incorporate very accurate timing source which are always preferable Loopback timing then allows the locking of the transmit timing of both Kilomux units to the accurate master clock provided by the network Application Considerations 1 43 Chapter 1 General Information Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Loopback Timing Loopback Timing 3 3 3 gt Digital gt 3 S lt Data lt S Q Network Q KILOMUX KILOMUX Master Clock Figure 1 33 Typical Loopback Timing Application DCE Timing KML 7 KML 8 KML 11 and KML F Modules When the DCE timing mode is used with a KML 7 KML 8 KML 11 or KML F module the timing signals of both the Kilomux unit s main link receive and transmit paths is taken from one of the I O module channels Alternatively in dual link chassis configurations the timing can be taken from the other main link module DCE Timing from I O Channel Similarly to the Internal mode the DCE timing mode can be used in point to point links and in independent networks In any link or network only one Kilomux unit may operate with DCE timing All the other units must use loopback timing adaptive when working with KML 11 to ensure synchronization In this way the unit that operates with DCE timing is the source of the master clock and determines timing of the entire network Figure 1 34 and Figure 1 35 show a basic network configuration that uses a KML 7 KML 8 K
286. x to permit free air flow When Kilomux is installed in a 19 rack allow at least 1U of space below and above the unit Electromagnetic Compatibility Considerations Kilomux is designed to comply with the electromagnetic compatibility EMC requirements of Sub Part J of FCC Rules Part 15 for Class A electronic equipment To meet these standards it is necessary to perform the following e Connect the Kilomux unit to a low resistance grounding system e Install blank panels to cover all empty slots Appropriate blank panels can be ordered from RAD Refer to the latest Product Catalog Catalog No 801529 Current and Power Requirements of Kilomux Power Supply Modules Kilomux power supplies provide supply voltages of 5V 12V and 12V Table 2 1 lists the power requirements of the Kilomux modules Site Requirements and Prerequisites 2 3 Chapter 2 Installation Table 2 1 Power Consumption of Kilomux Modules Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual 1 0 Module 5 VDC 12 VDC 12 VDC Power Power Power Consumption Consumption Consumption Watts Watts Watts KLS 1 0 26 0 36 0 216 KLS 1 NEW 0 25 0 36 0 24 KLS 2 0 41 0 264 0 072 KHS 1 0 8 0 78 0 084 KHS 1 V 35 0 8 0 78 0 12 KHS 2 1 055 0 912 0 084 KHS 703 0 8 KHS U 2 0 KVC 1 E amp M 0 875 0 18 KVC 1 FXS 1 15 0 396 KVC 1 FXO 0 875 0 06 KVC 1M FXS 1 6 0 72 KVC 1M FXSP 2 45 0 84 KVC 1M FXO 1 05 0 3 KVC 1M E amp M 1 5 0 36 KVC 1M FXS C
287. x Power Supply Modules 0 cceseseeeeeeeeeeeees 2 6 Ratings of Ring and Feed Voltage Supplies asia cat tasiat Maansteadedastadedinanpaiaaialidsndasiiiisiuetadieaaaienias 2 7 23 Equipment N eded senges ioeina E e E E EERE 2 8 Terminal Characteristics sasina aai R A A E A E NSE 2 8 Software Requirements sessist senn iea EE R E AAE 2 8 Supervisory Port Interface Characteristics ss snsssessesessrsisenetssestrtistnstrenrtsnstnnrennsentenesenne 2 8 Connection of Supervision Terminals ssia Ea aE a E Sa 2 9 2 4 Package ONC IG fea usa stein prerese sinin aee oiva tines en o E aE aia 2 11 2 5 Installation and Setup of KilOMUX a sstentacautincnasieokeudieabnandaelyamanse tibeanianbabeseabantnaadounatsoveies 2 12 Kilornux 21 00 sons isai a KEANE REA E a a a aea 2 12 KilomUx 2TA saat E E A E E tea snenugadeang 2 13 KES ModUlE cisne E e EE O A AE EAA EN EEO TES 2 13 ICED MOC UE siir E E R EO A EE R 2 14 2 6 Intra Ces and CORNECHONG iors eE EE EA 2 16 KES Mod le isptar E EEE NE EAT EOR E ETS 2 16 KOLA Modules szaros SE E TE EE E E 2 17 Connections to KML Options I O Modules and Ringers s ssssssssssssnesssssinerssssrsessrssrsrrenees 2 19 ION 2 04 oes50 5 cosicacctuaseds estas A A ARA EI E A R E ENR 2 19 2 7 Initial Setup and CONS PATON ssississisissssiisciersisisinriessisissrsssissnsisiinnssisisesisis neisiet 2 21 Chapter 3 Configuring Kilomux 3 1 introductioN srs ot tea accede ia e aiaa e eg ae 3 1 3 2 C ntrol of Kilomux Operati
288. x waits for the password before continuing After the correct password is received Kilomux sends the following working prompt KM2100 gt for Kilomux 2100 KM2104 gt for Kilomux 2104 If password protection is off this step is omitted and the working prompt appears after the node address conditions are fulfilled The first action to be carried out when starting a session is to check and if necessary set the correct terminal control codes using the F command The terminal control codes determined by the F command are used to clear the screen move the cursor to the screen home position and move the cursor to the right by one position Using the terminal control codes suitable for the type of terminal connected to Kilomux is essential to proper display of the information sent by Kilomux on the terminal screen certain combinations of codes can lead to unclear displays If the information on your screen is unclear issue the INIT F command If there are no parameters use the F command to set the desired control codes Command Evaluation and Execution After the working prompt is displayed every character typed on the terminal keyboard is immediately evaluated by Kilomux and echoed to the terminal screen Full duplex communication with the terminal is therefore necessary to provide on line feedback to the terminal operator Command evaluation starts only when the ENTER key is pressed Certain commands mainly DSP c
289. ypical display is shown below ES WAIT FOR CONNECT DIAL MODE ALT NUM MODE 60SEC TONE NO 2 Change the parameter values as follows Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by pressing the space bar To change the selected field press F or B to scroll among the available selections When the desired selection is displayed press the space bar to move to the next field The call out parameters are displayed on the first page of the data form Call out parameters their functions and their range of values are shown in Table F 1 F 10 Commands Kilomux 2100 2104 Installation and Operation Manual Designation NUM_OF_RETRIES Table F 1 Call out Parameters Function Controls the number of dialing tries and applies to both the primary and the alternate numbers e Ifthe call is not established after dialing the primary directory number the specified number of times Kilomux attempts to establish the call by dialing the alternate directory number provided the use of an alternate number is enabled by means of the ALT _NUM_ MODE parameter e Ifthe call cannot be established within the specified number of redialing attempts on neither of the two directory numbers Kilomux stops the call attempts When a new alarm report must be sent the call attempts are started again The user is notified that the call attempts failed by a message recorded in the ala

Kilomux-2100/2104 - RAD Data Communications

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents